EM-C7100 User's Guide
3
Contents
EM-C7100 User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 17
Product Basics .......................................................................................................................................... 18
Installing or Using Optional Parts ....................................................................................................... 18
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts .............................................................................. 18
Installing the Optional Cabinet....................................................................................................... 19
Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units ................................................................................. 26
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows................................................................... 33
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows..................... 34
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Mac .......................................................................... 36
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassette - PostScript Printer Software - Mac .............................. 37
Product Parts Locations ..................................................................................................................... 38
Product Parts - Front ..................................................................................................................... 39
Product Parts - Inside .................................................................................................................... 43
Product Parts - Back...................................................................................................................... 45
Using the Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 46
Control Panel Buttons and Lights .................................................................................................. 46
Guide to the Home Screen........................................................................................................ 48
Status Icon Information ............................................................................................................. 48
Changing LCD Screen Language.................................................................................................. 50
Selecting the Date and Time ......................................................................................................... 50
Selecting Your Country or Region ................................................................................................. 51
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel ....................................................................... 51
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen................................................................................... 53
Using Presets............................................................................................................................ 53
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control) ...................................................................... 54
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds.................................................................................................... 55
Adjusting the Screen Brightness.................................................................................................... 55
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting .................................................................................. 56
Preventing PC Connection via USB .............................................................................................. 56
Using Power Saving Settings ............................................................................................................. 56
4
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings ............................................................................................... 56
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings ........................................................................................ 57
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More ......................................................... 58
Setting Up Epson Connect Services.............................................................................................. 58
Using Epson Email Print ............................................................................................................... 59
Using Epson Remote Print ........................................................................................................... 59
Using Epson Scan to Cloud........................................................................................................... 60
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 61
Using the Mopria Print Service .......................................................................................................... 62
Using Mopria Scan ............................................................................................................................. 62
Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook ................................................................................................ 63
Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler ................................................................................ 63
Voice-activated Printing ..................................................................................................................... 63
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking........................................................................................................................ 65
Network Security Recommendations ................................................................................................. 65
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup......................................................................................................... 66
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel ........................................................ 67
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup .................................................................................................................... 68
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode ........................................................................................................... 69
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)............................................................................................................. 70
Using WPS to Connect to a Network ............................................................................................. 70
Printing a Network Status Sheet......................................................................................................... 71
Configuring Email Server Settings...................................................................................................... 71
Changing or Updating Network Connections ..................................................................................... 72
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection...................................................................... 72
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection...................................................... 72
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router ................................................................................................ 73
Disabling Wi-Fi Features ............................................................................................................... 73
Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing.................................................... 75
Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ....................................................................... 75
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ............................................................... 79
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac ....................................................................... 79
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings ....................................................................... 80
5
PDL Print Configuration Options.................................................................................................... 80
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings ............................................................................ 83
Printing Language and Interface Options ...................................................................................... 83
Printing a PCL or PS (PostScript) Status Sheet ................................................................................. 84
Loading Paper ........................................................................................................................................... 85
Loading Paper in the Cassette and Rear Paper Feed Slot ................................................................. 85
Paper Loading Capacity..................................................................................................................... 87
Double-sided Printing Paper Types.................................................................................................... 89
Compatible Epson Papers.................................................................................................................. 90
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software.............................................................................. 93
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel ........................................................... 94
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel ............................................................................................. 94
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator................................................................................ 95
Selecting the Default Printer Settings ............................................................................................ 95
Paper Source Settings Options................................................................................................. 96
Selecting the Universal Print Settings............................................................................................ 97
Universal Print Settings Options ............................................................................................... 97
Placing Originals on the Product ............................................................................................................. 99
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass ............................................................................................. 99
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder ...................................................................... 100
Copying .................................................................................................................................................... 102
Copying Documents or Photos......................................................................................................... 102
Copying Options............................................................................................................................... 103
Printing from a Computer ....................................................................................................................... 106
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows ......................................................... 106
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows .................................................................................... 107
Paper Source Options - Windows ........................................................................................... 109
Print Quality Options - Windows ............................................................................................. 110
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows................................................................................... 110
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows ................................................................... 111
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows............................................................................... 113
Print Density Adjustments - Windows ..................................................................................... 114
6
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows ........................................................... 114
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows ......................................................................... 116
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows.................................................................. 117
Header/Footer Settings - Windows ......................................................................................... 118
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows......................................................................................... 120
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows ...................................................................................... 122
Extended Settings - Windows ................................................................................................. 123
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows............................................................................... 125
Locking Printer Settings - Windows ............................................................................................. 125
Locked Setting Options........................................................................................................... 127
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing ............................................................................. 128
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows.................................................................................. 130
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens ....................................................... 131
Changing Automatic Update Options .......................................................................................... 132
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac................................................................. 133
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac ........................................................................................... 133
Paper Source Options - Mac................................................................................................... 136
Print Quality Options - Mac ..................................................................................................... 137
Print Options - Mac ................................................................................................................. 137
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac .......................................................................................... 138
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac........................................................................................... 139
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac........................................................................... 139
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac........................................................... 141
Managing Color - Mac ................................................................................................................ 141
Color Matching and Color Options - Mac ............................................................................... 142
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac .......................................................................................... 143
Printing Preferences - Mac...................................................................................................... 144
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac ...................................................................................... 145
Checking Print Status - Mac.................................................................................................... 146
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows................................................................. 146
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ................................... 147
Selecting Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows .............................................. 149
Selecting Default Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows.................................. 151
7
Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ............................................. 152
Epson Universal Print Driver Locked Setting Options ............................................................. 153
Adding Network Printers - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows............................................. 154
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ........................................................ 157
Selecting Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows ................................................ 157
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows.................................... 159
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac ................................................................ 161
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac ............................................. 161
Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet............................................................................................... 166
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button...................................................................................... 166
Scanning .................................................................................................................................................. 167
Starting a Scan................................................................................................................................. 167
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel ........................................................................ 167
Scanning to Email ................................................................................................................... 169
Scanning to a Memory Device ................................................................................................ 170
Scanning to the Cloud............................................................................................................. 170
Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7)....................................................................................... 171
Control Panel Scanning Options............................................................................................. 172
Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server...................................................... 173
Creating a Shared Network Folder.......................................................................................... 174
Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config ............................... 176
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel ........................... 177
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server.......................................................................... 178
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning........................................................................... 180
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon ............................................................................. 180
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program................................................................................... 183
Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet.............................................................................. 185
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture .......................................................... 185
Setting the Operation Mode on the Product Control Panel .......................................................... 186
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows .............................................. 186
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows.................................................... 188
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows .................................. 189
Scanning with Document Capture - Mac ..................................................................................... 192
8
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture - Mac ................................................ 195
Scanning in Epson Scan 2 ............................................................................................................... 196
Available Document Source Settings .......................................................................................... 199
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab ....................................................................... 199
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab............................................................... 200
Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2 ................................... 201
Image Format Options................................................................................................................. 203
Scan Resolution Guidelines ........................................................................................................ 203
Scanning Special Projects................................................................................................................ 204
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service - Windows.................................................... 204
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service - Mac ........................................................... 206
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows ...................................................... 208
Faxing....................................................................................................................................................... 211
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine.............................................................................. 211
Setting Up Fax Features .................................................................................................................. 216
Setting Up Basic Fax Features .................................................................................................... 216
Using the Fax Setting Wizard.................................................................................................. 216
Selecting the Line Type........................................................................................................... 218
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer .................................................................................. 218
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings................................................................................................ 218
Basic Settings - Fax ................................................................................................................ 219
Send Settings - Fax................................................................................................................. 221
Receive Settings - Fax............................................................................................................ 222
Report Settings - Fax .............................................................................................................. 224
Security Settings - Fax ............................................................................................................ 225
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows............................................................................................ 226
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Mac ................................................................... 228
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups......................................................................................... 229
Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel................................................................. 230
Creating a Contact .................................................................................................................. 230
Editing or Deleting a Contact .................................................................................................. 231
Creating a Contact Group ....................................................................................................... 231
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group........................................................................................ 232
9
Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................................. 232
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel........................................................................... 233
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History...................................................... 233
Fax Sending Options .............................................................................................................. 235
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time ......................................................................................... 237
Receiving a Fax by Polling...................................................................................................... 238
Sending a Stored Fax ............................................................................................................. 238
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone ............................................................... 239
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows .......................................................................... 240
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac .................................................................................. 242
Receiving Faxes............................................................................................................................... 245
Fax Reception ............................................................................................................................. 245
Receiving Faxes Automatically ................................................................................................... 246
Receiving Faxes Manually........................................................................................................... 246
Forwarding Received Faxes........................................................................................................ 247
Receiving a Fax by Polling .......................................................................................................... 247
Saving Faxes to an External USB Device ................................................................................... 248
Saving and Viewing Received Faxes .......................................................................................... 248
Checking Fax Status ....................................................................................................................... 249
Printing Fax Reports......................................................................................................................... 250
Fax Report Options ..................................................................................................................... 250
Using External USB Devices with Your Product................................................................................... 251
Connecting a USB Device................................................................................................................ 251
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen ...................................................................................... 252
Printing JPEG Photos.................................................................................................................. 252
Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode......................................................................................... 253
Printing TIFF and PDF Files ....................................................................................................... 254
Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode........................................................................................... 255
Print Setting Options - PDF Mode........................................................................................... 256
Transferring Files on a USB Device ................................................................................................. 256
Setting Up USB Device Access ................................................................................................... 256
Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers................................................ 258
Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status................................................................................. 258
10
Ink Safety Precautions................................................................................................................. 259
Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen...................................................................................... 261
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status with Windows .......................................................... 262
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status - Mac ............................................................. 262
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box .................................................................... 263
Ink Cartridge Part Numbers ......................................................................................................... 264
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges............................................................................................ 264
Maintenance Box Replacement ....................................................................................................... 267
Replacing the Rollers for Paper Cassette 1...................................................................................... 268
Replacing the Rollers for Paper Cassettes 2 to 4 ............................................................................. 273
Resetting the Roller Counter on the LCD Screen............................................................................. 278
Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges ................................................................... 279
Printing with Expended Color Ink Cartridges - Control Panel....................................................... 279
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - Windows ................................................................... 280
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - Mac ........................................................................... 280
Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows ......................................................................................... 282
Adjusting Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 283
Print Quality Adjustment................................................................................................................... 283
Adjusting the Print Quality Using the Product Control Panel........................................................ 283
Adjusting the Quality for Each Paper Type .................................................................................. 285
Printhead Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 286
Print Head Nozzle Check............................................................................................................. 286
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel ......................................................... 286
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility...................................................................... 288
Print Head Cleaning .................................................................................................................... 291
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel ...................................................... 291
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility................................................................... 292
Print Head Alignment ....................................................................................................................... 294
Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel ............................................................ 295
Cleaning the Paper Guide ................................................................................................................ 295
Cleaning and Transporting Your Product ............................................................................................. 297
Cleaning Your Product ..................................................................................................................... 297
Cleaning the Scanner Glass............................................................................................................. 298
11
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder....................................................................................... 299
Transporting Your Product ............................................................................................................... 301
Administering Your Product................................................................................................................... 304
Accessing the Web Config Utility...................................................................................................... 304
Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config...................................................................... 305
Configuring Product Settings............................................................................................................ 305
Checking Status Information ....................................................................................................... 306
Managing the Network Connection.............................................................................................. 306
Network Settings..................................................................................................................... 307
Setting Control Panel Options ..................................................................................................... 311
Sending Email Notifications......................................................................................................... 311
Adjusting Power Saving Settings................................................................................................. 312
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds.................................................................................................. 312
Importing and Exporting Product Settings ................................................................................... 313
Exporting Settings Using Web Config ..................................................................................... 313
Importing Settings Using Web Config ..................................................................................... 314
Updating Firmware Using Web Config ........................................................................................ 314
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server ................................................................. 314
Clearing the Internal Memory ...................................................................................................... 315
Adjusting the Contact List View Options...................................................................................... 315
Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely ....................................................................... 316
Restoring Default Product Settings.............................................................................................. 316
Configuring Security Settings ........................................................................................................... 316
Connecting an Authentication Device.......................................................................................... 317
Restricting Features Available for Users ..................................................................................... 318
User Feature Restriction ......................................................................................................... 318
Configuring User Feature Restrictions .................................................................................... 318
Disabling the External Interface................................................................................................... 319
Setting Up Password Encryption ................................................................................................. 320
Working with Audit Logs .............................................................................................................. 320
Restricting PDL File Operations .................................................................................................. 321
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up .................................................................................. 321
Restricting Domain Access.......................................................................................................... 321
12
Using Your Product on a Secure Network ........................................................................................ 322
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config ..................................................................... 322
Protocol Settings..................................................................................................................... 322
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication......................................................................................... 326
Configuring SSL/TLS Settings ................................................................................................ 326
Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product...................................................................... 327
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering ...................................................................................................... 327
About IPsec/IP Filtering .......................................................................................................... 328
Configuring the Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy..................................................................... 328
Configuring the Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies ................................................................... 328
IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings ............................................................................................ 329
IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples.............................................................................. 333
Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate ........................................................................... 334
Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network................................................................... 335
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network ..................................................................................... 335
IEEE 802.1X Network Settings ............................................................................................... 336
Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network ............................................................ 337
IEEE 802.1X Network Status .................................................................................................. 337
Using a Digital Certificate ............................................................................................................ 338
About Digital Certification........................................................................................................ 338
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate .................................................................... 339
CSR Setup Settings ................................................................................................................ 340
CSR Import Settings ............................................................................................................... 340
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate............................................................................................. 342
Updating a Self-signed Certificate........................................................................................... 342
Importing a CA Certificate....................................................................................................... 343
Deleting a CA Certificate......................................................................................................... 343
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft) .............................................................................................. 344
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software......................................................................... 344
Solving Problems .................................................................................................................................... 345
Viewing the Help Screen .................................................................................................................. 345
Product Status Messages ................................................................................................................ 345
Job Status Error Codes .................................................................................................................... 349
13
Running a Product Check ................................................................................................................ 353
Resetting Control Panel Defaults ..................................................................................................... 354
Solving Setup Problems ................................................................................................................... 355
Product Does Not Turn On or Off................................................................................................. 355
Noise After Ink Installation........................................................................................................... 356
Software Installation Problems .................................................................................................... 356
Solving Network Problems ............................................................................................................... 356
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point .................................................. 357
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network................................................................. 358
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window ....................................................................... 359
Cannot Print Over a Network....................................................................................................... 360
Cannot Scan Over a Network ...................................................................................................... 362
Solving Copying Problems ............................................................................................................... 363
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies.................................................................................. 363
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While............................................................................. 363
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder.................................................... 363
Solving Paper Problems................................................................................................................... 364
Paper Feeding Problems............................................................................................................. 364
Paper Jams Inside the Product.................................................................................................... 365
Paper Ejection Problems ............................................................................................................. 366
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer..................................................................................... 366
Nothing Prints.............................................................................................................................. 367
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar ................................................................... 368
Printing is Slow ............................................................................................................................ 368
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems.................................................................................... 370
Inverted Image............................................................................................................................. 370
Too Many Copies Print ................................................................................................................ 371
Blank Pages Print ........................................................................................................................ 371
Incorrect Margins on Printout....................................................................................................... 372
Incorrect Characters Print............................................................................................................ 372
Incorrect Image Size or Position.................................................................................................. 372
Slanted Printout........................................................................................................................... 373
Solving Print Quality Problems......................................................................................................... 374
14
White or Dark Lines in Printout .................................................................................................... 374
Blurry or Smeared Printout .......................................................................................................... 375
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps............................................................................................. 376
Grainy Printout............................................................................................................................. 377
Incorrect Colors .......................................................................................................................... 378
Solving Scanning Problems ............................................................................................................. 379
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly ......................................................................... 379
Cannot Start Epson Scan 2 ......................................................................................................... 380
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems ....................................................................................... 381
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only............................................................................................. 382
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images............................................................................... 382
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked ................................................................................ 383
Image is Distorted or Blurry ......................................................................................................... 383
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges ........................................................................................ 383
Image is Too Dark ....................................................................................................................... 384
Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image .................................................................... 384
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image............................................................................................ 384
Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors................................................................. 385
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped ........................................................................................... 385
Solving Faxing Problems.................................................................................................................. 385
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes................................................................................................... 386
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product ........................................ 388
Fax Memory Full Error Appears................................................................................................... 388
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size ................................................................................... 389
Received Fax is Not Printed ........................................................................................................ 389
Solving USB Device Problems ......................................................................................................... 390
Cannot View or Print from a USB Device..................................................................................... 390
Cannot Save Files on a USB Device ........................................................................................... 390
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device......................................................................... 391
Uninstall Your Product Software....................................................................................................... 391
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows.................................................................................... 391
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac............................................................................................ 393
Where to Get Help ........................................................................................................................... 393
15
Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 395
Windows System Requirements ...................................................................................................... 395
Mac System Requirements .............................................................................................................. 396
Paper Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 397
Printable Area Specifications ........................................................................................................... 398
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications .......................................................................... 400
Scanning Specifications ................................................................................................................... 400
Fax Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 401
Ink Cartridge Specifications.............................................................................................................. 403
Dimension Specifications ................................................................................................................. 404
Electrical Specifications ................................................................................................................... 405
Environmental Specifications ........................................................................................................... 406
Interface Specifications .................................................................................................................... 406
External USB Device Specifications................................................................................................. 406
Network Interface Specifications ...................................................................................................... 407
Safety and Approvals Specifications ................................................................................................ 409
PostScript Fonts............................................................................................................................... 410
PCL Fonts ........................................................................................................................................ 411
PCL Mode 5 Symbol Sets ................................................................................................................ 413
Notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 417
Important Safety Instructions............................................................................................................ 417
General Product Safety Instructions ............................................................................................ 417
Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions.................................................................................................. 419
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions ..................................................................................... 420
LCD Screen Safety Instructions................................................................................................... 420
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions ................................................................................... 421
FCC Compliance Statement............................................................................................................. 421
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver ............................................................................................... 424
Trademarks...................................................................................................................................... 427
Copyright Notice............................................................................................................................... 428
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials................................................... 428
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products ............................................... 428
Copyright Attribution.................................................................................................................... 429
17
EM-C7100 User's Guide
Welcome to the EM-C7100 User's Guide.
For a printable PDF copy of this guide, click here.
18
Product Basics
See these sections to learn about the basic features of your product.
Installing or Using Optional Parts
Product Parts Locations
Using the Control Panel
Using Power Saving Settings
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Using AirPrint
Using the Mopria Print Service
Using Mopria Scan
Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook
Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler
Voice-activated Printing
Installing or Using Optional Parts
Follow the instructions in this section to install or use optional parts.
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
Installing the Optional Cabinet
Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Parent topic: Product Basics
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales) or
epson.ca (Canadian sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller. To find
the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Option or part Part number
Replacement maintenance box C12C938211
Optional paper cassette C12C937901
Optional cabinet C12C932891
Paper Feed Roller for Cassette A (C1) C12C938261
19
Option or part Part number
Paper Feed Roller for Cassette B (C2-C4) C12C938281
Authentication Device Table-P2 C12C939531
Parent topic: Installing or Using Optional Parts
Installing the Optional Cabinet
You can install the optional cabinet to provide mobility and extra storage space.
1. Turn off the product, and unplug the power cord and any connected cables.
Warning: To avoid electric shock, make sure you unplug the power cord.
2. Remove the cabinet from its packaging and remove any protective materials.
3. Make sure you have all the items shown here:
1 Optional cabinet
2 Side stands (×2)
3 Front reinforcing bar
20
4 Rear reinforcing bar
5 Front cover
6 Cabinet screws (×2)
7 Rear brackets (×2)
8 Bracket screws (x2)
9 Side stand and reinforcing bar screws (×8)
4. Place the stands between the cabinet's casters as shown.
5. Secure the stands to the cabinet with the included screws.
Caution: Make sure the stands are securely attached or the product may fall over.
21
6. Attach and secure the reinforcing bars to the stands with the included screws.
7. Place the cabinet on a flat surface and lock the front casters.
22
8. Attach the front cover to the stands.
9. Remove the output tray from the product.
23
10. Remove the paper cassette from the product.
Note: If you are installing the optional cabinet under the optional paper cassette unit, remove the
paper cassette from the optional cassette unit instead.
24
11. Lift up your product or optional cassette unit and gently lower it onto the cabinet with the corners
aligned. Secure the product or optional cassette unit to the cabinet with the included screws using a
screwdriver.
Note: Screws may be left over after installation.
25
Warning: To lift the product, have two or more people hold it as shown here. Lifting from other areas
may cause the product to fall or cause you to pinch your fingers when placing the product down.
12. Secure the back of the product or paper cassette unit to the cabinet using the included brackets and
screws.
13. Insert the paper cassette you removed and attach the output tray.
14. Connect the power cord and other connection cables, then plug in the product.
26
Parent topic: Installing or Using Optional Parts
Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
You can install up to three optional paper cassette units to provide more paper capacity. If you are using
the optional cabinet, install the cabinet under the bottom optional cassette unit first.
1. Turn off the product, and unplug the power cord and any connected cables.
Warning: To avoid electric shock, make sure you unplug the power cord.
2. Uninstall any optional cassette units already installed on the product.
Note: To uninstall optional cassette units, turn off the product, unplug the power cord, disconnect
any cables, and follow the rest of these instructions in reverse.
3. Remove the paper cassette unit from its packaging and remove any protective materials.
4. Make sure you have all the items shown here:
1 Optional cassette
2 Screws (×4)
3 Paper size label
4 Cassette number sticker
27
5. Remove the output tray from the product.
6. Remove the paper cassette from the product.
28
7. Remove the paper cassette from the optional paper cassette unit.
8. Stack all optional paper cassette units on top of each other and secure them to each other with the
included screws.
29
9. Lift up your product and gently lower it onto the paper cassette unit with the corners aligned. Secure
the product to the paper cassette unit with the included screws using a screwdriver.
Note: Screws may be left over after installation.
30
Warning: To lift the product, have two people hold it as shown here. Lifting from other areas may
cause the product to fall or cause you to pinch your fingers when placing the product down.
31
10. Secure the back of the paper cassette units to each other and to the product using the included
brackets and screws.
11. Insert a label into the holder indicating the paper size to be loaded in each of the paper cassettes.
32
12. Insert the paper cassette and place the correct sticker on the cassette unit to indicate the cassette
number.
13. Attach the output tray.
14. Connect the power cord and other connection cables, then plug in the product.
15. Turn on the product.
16. Pull out and reinsert the paper cassettes in the optional paper cassette units and confirm that each
cassette unit number is displayed on the screen.
17. Enable the optional paper cassette units in the printer software.
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Mac
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassette - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Parent topic: Installing or Using Optional Parts
33
Related tasks
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassette - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows
You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software.
Note: Log on to your computer as an administrator.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name, then select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your printer name and select
Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click your printer name and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
34
You see a window like this:
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get.
The optional paper sources are listed in the Current Printer Information section.
4. Click OK.
The optional paper cassettes are now enabled.
Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Related tasks
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
If you installed optional paper cassette units, you need to enable the optional cassette units before you
can use them with the PS3 printer software.
Note: Log on to your computer as an administrator.
35
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name, then select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners . Select your
product name and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select
Printer Properties.
• Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click your product name, and select Properties.
2. Click the Device Settings tab.
36
You see a window like this:
3. Select the number of optional cassettes installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting.
4. Click OK.
The optional paper cassettes are now enabled.
Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Mac
You need to enable the optional paper cassette units before you can use them with the printer software.
Note: If you are using the PostScript (PS3) printer software, see the link below to enable the optional
cassette units.
37
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings.
2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
3. Select Driver or Options.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select the number of cassette units installed as the Lower Cassette setting.
5. Click OK.
The optional paper cassettes are now enabled.
Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Related tasks
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassette - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassette - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
If you installed the optional paper cassette unit, you need to enable it before you can use it with the PS3
printer software.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences.
38
2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
3. Select Driver or Options.
You see a screen like this:
4. Select the optional cassette installed as the Lower Cassette Unit setting.
5. Click OK.
The optional paper cassette is now enabled.
Parent topic: Installing the Optional Paper Cassette Units
Product Parts Locations
See these sections to identify the parts on your product.
Product Parts - Front
Product Parts - Inside
Product Parts - Back
Parent topic: Product Basics
39
Product Parts - Front
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, you
can use these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1 Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) cover (F)
40
2 ADF edge guides
3 ADF input tray (F)
4 ADF stopper
5 ADF output tray
6 Paper cassette 1 (C1)
7 Optional cassettes 2, 3, and 4 (C2, C3, and C4)
8 Optional cabinet
9 Optional cabinet front cover
41
10 Authentication Device Table-P2 (Optional)
1 Rear paper feed edge guides
2 Paper support and extension
3 Rear paper feed slot (B)
43
Product Parts - Inside
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, use
these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1 Document cover
45
Product Parts - Back
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code. If you encounter any paper jams or errors, use
these codes to locate and correct the problem.
1 Rear cover 2 (D2)
2 AC inlet
3 Rear cover 1 (D1)
4 Optional cassette rear covers (E)
5 Service USB port for future use (do not remove sticker)
46
6 LINE port
7 EXT. port
8 LAN port
9 USB port
Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
Using the Control Panel
See these sections to learn about the control panel and select control panel settings.
Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Changing LCD Screen Language
Selecting the Date and Time
Selecting Your Country or Region
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control)
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting
Preventing PC Connection via USB
Parent topic: Product Basics
Control Panel Buttons and Lights
47
1
The power button and light
2
The home button
3 The log out button
4
The help button
5
The Interrupt button
6
The Reset button
7 The Contacts button
8 The C Clear button
9 The numeric keypad
10 The Job/Status button, the Error light, and the Data light
11
The Paper Setting button
12
The stop button
13 The LCD screen
14 The return button
15
The received fax light
Guide to the Home Screen
Status Icon Information
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
48
Guide to the Home Screen
1 Indicates when a firmware update is available
2 Displays ink and maintenance box status
3 Indicates network status and accesses network settings
4 Indicates whether Quiet Mode is enabled
5 If the icon is not grayed out, enters into sleep mode when selected.
6 Indicates that the user restriction feature is enabled.
7 Displays the Fax Data Information screen.
8 Displays the menu options
9 Displays ongoing jobs that are on stand by.
10 Scrolls the screen to the right
Parent topic: Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Status Icon Information
Your product displays status icons on the LCD screen for certain product status conditions.
49
Icons Description
Indicates a firmware update is available
Ink and maintenance box status; select the icon to view the ink and maintenance box
levels
Displays the network connection status
• Not connected to a wired (Ethernet) network
• Connected to a wired (Ethernet) network
• Searching for an SSID or experiencing a wireless network connection issue
• Connected to a wireless network; the number of bars indicates the connection's
signal strength
• Wi-Fi Direct is not enabled
• Wi-Fi Direct is enabled
Displays the Device Sound Settings screen; select the icon to change the setting.
• Quiet Mode is enabled; noise is reduced during printing but print speed is slower
• Quiet Mode is disabled
• Mute is enabled
If the icon is not grayed out, enters into sleep mode when selected.
Indicates that the user restriction feature is enabled. Select this icon to log in to the printer.
You need to select a user name and then enter a password. Contact your printer
administrator for login information.
When is displayed, a user with access permission has logged in. Select the icon to
logout.
50
Icons Description
Displays the Fax Data Information screen.
Scrolls the screen to the right.
Parent topic: Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Changing LCD Screen Language
You can change the language used on the LCD screen.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Language.
3. Scroll up or down, if necessary, and select a language.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Selecting the Date and Time
Before using your product, select the current date, time, and daylight saving phase in your area, and
choose your preferred date and time format.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings.
3. Select Daylight Saving Time, then select the setting that applies to your area:
• Winter: it is winter or your region does not use Daylight Saving Time (DST)
• Summer: it is spring or summer and your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST)
51
Note: If your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST), you must change this setting to match the
season. When you change from Winter to Summer, your product automatically sets its clock ahead
one hour. When you change from Summer to Winter, it sets its clock back one hour.
4. On the Date/Time Settings screen, select Date/Time.
5. Select the date format you want to use.
6. Use the numeric keypad to enter the current date.
7. Select the time format you want to use.
8. Use the numeric keypad to enter the current time.
9. On the Date/Time Settings screen, select Time Difference.
10. Use the numeric keypad to enter the time difference between your time zone and UTC (Coordinated
Universal Time).
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Selecting Your Country or Region
Before using your product, select the country or region in which you are using your product.
Note: If you change the country or region, your fax settings return to their defaults and you must select
them again. This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Customer Research >
Country/Region.
3. Scroll up or down, if necessary, and select your country or region.
You see a confirmation screen.
4. If the setting is correct, select Yes. (If not, select No and retry.)
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
You can set an administrator password to lock the following settings and prevent them from being
changed:
• Network settings
52
• Web Service settings
• Fax settings
• Scan settings
• System Administration settings
• Language
• User settings
• Web Config settings
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Admin
Settings > Admin Password > Register.
3. Use the displayed keyboard to enter a password, then select OK.
4. Enter your password again to confirm, then select OK.
Note: Keep a copy of your password in a safe place.
5. Select Lock Setting and select On.
When the control panel is locked, you must enter the password to access any of the locked settings.
Note: If you forget your password, contact Epson for assistance.
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Using Presets
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Related tasks
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control)
53
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Follow these guidelines to enter characters for passwords and other settings.
1 Displays the character count
2 Moves the cursor left or right
3 Switches between uppercase and lowercase characters, numbers, and symbols
4 Switches between characters, numbers, and symbols
5 Displays a list of common domain names to choose from
6 Enters a space
7 Select when you are finished
8 Deletes the previous character
Parent topic: Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Using Presets
You can save frequently used copy, fax, and scan settings as presets. This lets you easily reuse them
whenever necessary.
54
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change presets, contact your
administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Presets.
3. Select Add New. Enter the Administrator password, if necessary.
Note: You can save up to 50 presets.
4. Select the function for which you want to set up a preset.
5. Select the settings you want to save and select Register.
6. Select Name.
7. Use the displayed keyboard to enter a name for the preset and select OK.
8. Select OK to return to the Presets screen.
When you copy, fax, or scan, you can use the preset by selecting Presets and selecting your preset
name from the list.
Parent topic: Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control)
Using Web Config Access Control Settings, you can restrict product features for individual users to
prevent misuse of the product. Restricted features require the user to enter an ID and password on the
product control panel.
After you setup feature restrictions, you must enable them using the product control panel.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Access
Control.
3. Select On.
4. Enable Accept Unknown User Jobs to allow jobs that do not have the necessary authentication
information.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
55
Related tasks
Setting a Password and Locking the Control Panel
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
You can adjust the sound level heard when you press buttons on the control panel.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sound.
3. Do one of the following:
• Select Mute to turn off all control panel sounds, then go to step 6.
• Select Normal Mode or Quiet Mode to adjust control panel sounds.
Note: Press the icon on the home screen to adjust sounds.
4. Select Button Press.
5. Select to decrease or to increase the sound select OK.
6. Select the back arrow to exit.
Note: You can also adjust the Sound Type and the sound level for various product functions.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > LCD Brightness.
3. Press the – or + icons to decrease or increase the brightness.
4. Select OK to exit.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
56
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting
The Operation Time Out setting causes the LCD screen to return to the Home screen after a few minutes
of inactivity. This feature is enabled by default, but you can turn it off.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Operation Time Out.
3. Select Off.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Preventing PC Connection via USB
You can disable access from a USB-connected computer. This restricts non-network access to the
product and protects the security of confidential scanned documents.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > PC Connection via USB.
3. Select Disable, then select OK.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Using Power Saving Settings
Your product enters sleep mode automatically and turns off the LCD screen if it is not used for a period
of time. You can make the time period shorter and select other options to save energy and resources.
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
Parent topic: Product Basics
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
You can adjust the time period before your product enters sleep mode and turns off the LCD screen.
57
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sleep Timer.
Note: Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
3. Do one of the following:
• Select the– or + icon to decrease or increase the number of minutes.
• Select the number of minutes on the LCD screen, select the number of minutes from the on-
screen or control panel keypad, and select OK.
4. Select OK.
5. Select Wake from Sleep.
6. Select Touch LCD Screen to Wake.
7. Do one of the following:
• Select On to wake the printer from sleep mode by tapping the LCD touchscreen or by pressing a
button on the control panel.
• Select Off to wake the printer from sleep mode by only pressing a button on the control panel.
This prevents unintentional operations due to objects bumping the LCD touchscreen.
• Select Scheduled to set a time range for the feature to be enabled.
Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
You can have the product turn off automatically if it is not used for a specified period of time.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings.
3. Do one of the following depending on the setting you see displayed on the LCD screen:
• Select Power Off Timer, then select a time period between 30minutes and 12h (12 hours).
58
• Select Power Off Settings, then select Power Off If Inactive to turn the printer off if it is not used
after a specified period of time or Power Off If Disconnected to turn the printer off if all ports
including the LINE port are disconnected after a specified period of time.
Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Use your smartphone, tablet, or computer to print and scan documents, photos, emails, and web pages
from your home, office, or even across the globe.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
Print from anywhere with these Epson Connect solutions:
• Epson Email Print
• Epson Remote Print
Scan and send a file as an email or upload it to an online service directly from your Epson product with
Epson Scan to Cloud.
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Using Epson Email Print
Using Epson Remote Print
Using Epson Scan to Cloud
Parent topic: Product Basics
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
If you did not activate your product's email address for use with Epson Connect when you set up your
product, you can activate it using the product control panel.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Web Service Settings > Epson Connect Services
3. Select Register.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to activate your product's email address.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
59
Using Epson Email Print
With Epson Email Print, you can print from any device that can send email, such as your smartphone,
tablet, or laptop. Just activate your product's unique email address. When you want to print, attach a
PDF, Microsoft Office document, or photo to an email and send it to your product. Both the email and the
attachments will print automatically.
1. Connect your product to your network. See the link below.
2. If you did not already set up Email Print when you installed your product software, see the link below
to use your product control panel to activate your unique email address. Or visit epson.com/connect
(U.S.) or epson.ca/connect (Canada) to learn more about Email Print, create your Epson Connect
account, and register your product to the Epson Connect service.
3. Now you are ready to send and print emails to your product's Email Print address.
Note: Go to epsonconnect.com and log into your Epson Connect account to personalize your product's
email, adjust print settings, and set up other Epson Connect services.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related tasks
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Epson Remote Print
With Epson Remote Print software, you can print from your laptop or desktop computer to an Epson
Email-enabled product anywhere in the world.
1. Connect your Epson product to your wireless network. See the link below.
2. If you did not already set up an Epson Connect account when you installed your product software,
visit epsonconnect.com to create your account and register your product to the Epson Connect
service.
Note: Make a note of your product's email address.
3. Visit epsonconnect.com to learn more about Remote Print and how to download the Remote Print
Driver software.
4. Download and install the Remote Print software.
60
5. Enter the email address and optional access key of your Epson product during Remote Print setup.
6. Now you are ready to print remotely. Select the print command in your laptop or desktop computer
application and choose the Remote Print option for your Epson product.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Epson Scan to Cloud
The Epson Scan to Cloud service allows you to scan and send a file as an email or upload it to an online
service directly from your Epson product. Register an email address or online services such as Box,
DropBox, Evernote, or Google Drive with your Epson Connect account.
1. Connect your Epson product to your network. See the link below.
2. If you did not already set up an Epson Connect account when you installed your product software,
visit epsonconnect.com to create your account and register your product to the Epson Connect
service.
Note: Make a note of your product's email address and password.
3. Visit epsonconnect.com to sign into your account with the email address and password you
selected.
4. Select your product, select Scan to Cloud, and select Destination List.
5. Click Add, then follow the instructions on the screen to create your destination list.
6. Now you are ready to use Scan to Cloud. Select the setting for scanning to Scan to Cloud on your
Epson product control panel.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
61
Using AirPrint
AirPrint enables instant wireless printing from iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac without the need to
install drivers or download software.
Note: If you disabled paper configuration messages on your product control panel, you cannot use
AirPrint. See the link below to enable the messages, if necessary.
1. Load paper in your product.
2. Set up your product for wireless printing. See the link below.
3. Connect your Apple device to the same wireless network that your product is using.
4. Print from your device to your product.
Note: For details, see the AirPrint page on the Apple website.
Parent topic: Product Basics
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
62
Using the Mopria Print Service
Mopria Print Service enables printing to Mopria certified printers and multifunction printers from many
manufacturers. Mobile printing from your Android phone or tablet may be accomplished using the Mopria
Print Service app in the Google Play Store.
Note: For details and support on the Mopria Print Service, visit https://mopria.org.
Parent topic: Product Basics
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Mopria Scan
Mopria Scan enables scanning from Mopria certified multifunction printers and scanners from many
manufacturers. Mobile scanning from your Android phone or tablet may be accomplished using the
Mopria Scan app in the Google Play Store.
63
Note: For details and support on Mopria Scan, visit https://mopria.org.
Parent topic: Product Basics
Setting Up Printing on a Chromebook
Your Epson printer supports native printing on Chromebook, allowing you to print from a Chromebook
without drivers or cables.
For directions on setting up your printer, visit Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (U.S.)
or Setting Up Your Epson Printer on Your Chromebook (Canada).
Parent topic: Product Basics
Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler
You can wirelessly print your documents, emails, photos, and web pages right from your Android phone
or tablet. With a few taps, your Android device will discover your nearby Epson product and print.
Note: Operations may differ depending on the device.
1. Connect your Epson product to your wireless network. See the link below.
2. On your Android device, download the Epson Print Enabler plug-in from Google Play.
3. Go to Settings on your Android device, select Printing, and enable the Epson plug-in, if necessary.
4. Connect your Android device to the same wireless network as your product.
5. Now you are ready to print. From an Android application such as Chrome or Gmail, tap the menu
icon and print whatever is on the screen.
Note: If you do not see your product, tap All Printers and select your product.
Parent topic: Product Basics
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Voice-activated Printing
Take advantage of voice-activated, hands-free printing from your Epson product with Alexa. You can ask
your product to print photos, calendars, recipes, photo props, and more. Click here for more information.
1. Connect your product to your network. See the link below.
64
2. Set up your product's email address for use with Epson Connect. See the link below to activate it
from the product control panel.
3. Click here for instructions on how to set up your product and voice assistant to use the voice-
activated printing feature.
Now you are ready to print with your voice and your Epson product.
Parent topic: Product Basics
65
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
See these sections to use your product on a Wi-Fi or wired network.
Network Security Recommendations
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Configuring Email Server Settings
Changing or Updating Network Connections
Network Security Recommendations
To help deter unauthorized access to your product over a network, you should protect your network
environment using appropriate security measures.
Security measures such as these can help deter threats such as loss of user data, use of telephone and
fax lines, and other intrusions:
• Enable security on your wireless LAN
Enable the appropriate security on the wireless LAN you plan to use with your product. Network
security such as a network password can deter interception of traffic over the wireless LAN. Your
router may already have a default password enabled by your Internet service provider (ISP). See your
ISP and router documentation for instructions on how to change the default password and better
secure your network.
• Connect your product only to a network protected by a firewall
Connecting your product directly to the Internet may leave it vulnerable to security threats. Instead,
connect it to a router or other network connection protected by a firewall. Your router may already
have a firewall set up by your Internet service provider; check with your ISP for confirmation. For best
results, set up and use a private IP address for your network connection.
• Change the default administrator password on your product
If your product has the option to set an administrator password, change the default administrator
password to deter access by unauthorized users to personal data stored on your product, such as IDs,
passwords, and contact lists.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
66
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate with your computer using a wireless router or access point.
The wireless router or access point can be connected to your computer over a wireless or wired network.
1 Epson product
2 Wireless router or access point
3 Computer with a wireless interface
4 Computer
5 Internet
6 Ethernet cable (used only for wired connection to the wireless router or access point)
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
67
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
You can select or change wireless network settings using your product control panel.
To install your product on a wireless network, install the necessary software by downloading it from the
Epson website. The installer program guides you through network setup.
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is
not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We
recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Press the icon.
3. Select Router.
4. Select Start Setup, Change Settings, or Change to Wi-Fi Connection, depending on your current
connection settings.
5. Select Wi-Fi Setup Wizard.
6. Select the name of your wireless network or select Enter Manually to enter the name manually. Use
the displayed keypad to enter your network name.
7. Select the Password field and enter your wireless password using the displayed keypad.
Note: The network name and password are case sensitive. Be sure to correctly enter uppercase and
lowercase letters, and numeric or special characters.
• To move the cursor, press the left or right arrows.
• To change the case of letters, press .
• To delete the previous character, press .
• To enter numbers and symbols, press .
• To enter a space, press Space.
8. Press OK when you finish entering your password.
9. Confirm the displayed network settings and select Start Setup to save them.
68
10. If you want to print a network setup report, select Print Check Report. (Otherwise, select OK.)
11. Press the home button to exit.
You see the icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product directly
from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure you
installed the network software from the Epson website.
Note: If you don't see the icon, you may have selected the wrong network name or entered the
password incorrectly. Repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
Related references
Status Icon Information
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate directly with your computer or another device without
requiring a wireless router or access point. In Wi-Fi Direct Mode, the product itself acts as a network
access point for up to 8 devices.
1 Epson product
69
2 Computer with a wireless interface
3 Other wireless device
Note: The product normally uses W52 (36ch) as the channel when connecting to Wi-Fi Direct (Simple
AP). Since the channel for wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) connection is selected automatically, the channel used
may differ when used at the same time as a Wi-Fi Direct connection. Sending data to the printer may be
delayed if the channels are different. If it does not interfere with use, connect to the SSID in the 2.4 GHz
band. In the 2.4 GHz frequency band, the channels used will match.
When setting the wireless LAN to 5 GHz, we recommend disabling Wi-Fi Direct.
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct mode to allow direct communication between your product and computer or
other devices without a wireless router or access point.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Press the icon.
3. Select Wi-Fi Direct.
4. Scroll down and select Start Setup.
5. Select Start Setup again.
6. Use your computer or wireless device to select the Wi-Fi network name (SSID) displayed on the
LCD screen, then enter the password shown.
7. Press the home button to exit.
You see the icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product
directly from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure
you installed the network software from the Epson website.
Note: If you don't see the icon on the LCD screen, you may have selected the wrong network
name or entered the password incorrectly. Repeat these steps to try again.
70
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Related references
Status Icon Information
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
If your network uses a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can quickly connect your
product to the network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS).
Note: To check if your router is WPS-enabled, look for a button labeled WPS on your router or access
point. If there is no hardware button, there may be a virtual WPS button in the device's software. Check
your network product documentation for details.
Using WPS to Connect to a Network
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using WPS to Connect to a Network
If you have a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can use Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) to
connect your product to the network.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Press the icon.
You see a screen like this:
71
3. Select Router, then select Start Setup, Change Settings, or Change to Wi-Fi connection,
depending on your current connection settings.
4. Select Push Button Setup (WPS).
5. Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to complete WPS setup.
6. Press the home button to exit.
You see the icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product directly
from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure you
installed the network software from the Epson website.
Note: If you don't see the icon, repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Printing a Network Status Sheet
You can print a network status sheet to help you determine the causes of any problems you may have
using your product on a network.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Network Status > Print Status Sheet >
Print.
Examine the settings shown on the network status sheet to diagnose any problems you have.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Configuring Email Server Settings
To use features such as scanning to email or forwarding faxes to email, you need to configure the email
server. You can select settings for the email server using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings.
3. Scroll down and select Advanced.
72
4. Select Email Server > Server Settings.
5. Select one of the options shown above, then select the settings you want to use. Contact your
internet service provider if necessary to confirm the authentication method for the email server.
6. Select Proceed to save your settings.
7. Select Close to exit.
8. Select Connection Check to verify the connection to the email server.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Related tasks
Scanning to Email
Forwarding Received Faxes
Changing or Updating Network Connections
See these sections to change or update how your product connects to a network.
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router
Disabling Wi-Fi Features
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Changing a USB Connection to a Wi-Fi Connection
If you have already connected your product to your computer using a USB connection, you can change
to a Wi-Fi connection.
1. Disconnect the USB cable from your product.
2. Uninstall your product software.
3. Download and install your product software from the Epson website.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Changing a Wi-Fi Connection to a Wired Network Connection
If you have already connected your product to your computer wirelessly, you can change to a wired
network connection if necessary.
1. Disable your product's Wi-Fi features.
73
2. Connect one end of an Ethernet network cable to the product's LAN port.
3. Connect the other end to any available LAN port on your router or access point.
4. Uninstall your product software.
5. Download and install your product software from the Epson website.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.
7. When you see the Select Your Connection screen, select Wired network connection.
8. If you see a Select Setup Option screen, select Set up printer for the first time.
9. Continue following the rest of the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related tasks
Disabling Wi-Fi Features
Connecting to a New Wi-Fi Router
If you change the wireless router you have been using on your network, you need to update your
product's Wi-Fi connection to the new router.
Note: If you switch to a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation for instructions.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Uninstall your product software.
• Mac: Go to the next step.
2. Download and install your product software from the Epson website.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
Related tasks
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
Disabling Wi-Fi Features
You may need to disable your product's Wi-Fi features if you change your network connection type or
need to solve a problem with your network connection.
74
Note: Before disabling Wi-Fi features, make a note of your product's SSID (network name) and
password, and any network settings selected for the Epson Connect services you may use.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Press the icon.
3. Select Router > Change Settings > Others > Disable Wi-Fi > Yes to disable Wi-Fi.
Parent topic: Changing or Updating Network Connections
75
Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript
Printing
Before enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript printing on your product, make sure
you have installed the software from the Epson website.
To download the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript drivers, visit epson.com/support (U.S.),
epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
Printing a PCL or PS (PostScript) Status Sheet
Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
The Epson Universal Print Driver supports multiple printer languages, such as PCL and ESC/P-R, and
can be installed on a Windows computer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software. Depending on your model, not all printer languages may be supported.
1. To download the EPSON Universal Print Driver file, visit epson.com/support (U.S) or
epson.ca/support (Canada) and select your product.
2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software.
76
3. Follow the on-screen instructions until you see this screen:
4. Select Yes: Network connection and click OK.
Note: Select the Set Default of Printer Control Language to PCL6 checkbox if you want to set the
default printer language to PCL6. Leave this option deselected to set the printer language to ESC/P-
R. (You can change this setting later as needed.)
77
After the software finishes searching for products, you see a screen like this:
5. Do one of the following:
• If you are installing one product, make sure Add EPSON Universal Print Driver is selected and
continue with the next step.
• If you are installing more than one product, select Add found printers and go to step 9.
Note: You can customize and filter your product search results by clicking Display Settings.
78
6. Open the Select a port to connect a printer menu and select an existing printer port, if necessary.
Otherwise, skip this option to create a new port automatically.
7. Select the product you want to install from the Found Printers list.
Note: Deselect the Set as default printer checkbox if you do not want the product to be set as your
default printer.
8. Click OK, then skip the remaining steps.
9. If you are installing more than one product, select the products from the Found Printers list and click
Add to Printer Folder.
79
The selected products appear in the lower section of the screen.
10. Select the checkbox next to the product you want to make your default printer, if necessary.
11. Click OK.
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
If you did not install the standard Epson printer software or Epson Universal Print Driver, you need to
install the PostScript (PS3) printer software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your
network printer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software.
1. To download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package - PS3 PostScript file, visit
epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)
and select your product.
2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Accept.
5. Click Install.
6. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
If you did not install the standard Epson printer software, you need to install the PostScript (PS3) printer
software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your network printer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software.
1. To download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package - PS3 PostScript file, visit
epson.com/support (U.S) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and select your product.
2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software.
80
3. Double-click EPSON.
4. Click Continue on the next two screens.
5. Click Agree.
6. Click Install or Continue.
7. If necessary, enter the administrator password.
8. Click Start and follow the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
You can select settings for PCL and PostScript printing using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > PDL Print Configuration.
3. Select one of the options shown above, then select the PDL print configuration options you want to
use.
4. When you are finished, press the home button to exit.
PDL Print Configuration Options
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
PDL Print Configuration Options
Select the PDL Print Configuration options you want to use for PCL or PostScript printing.
PDL Print Configuration
option
Available
settings
Description
Common Settings
Paper Size Various sizes Sets the default paper size for PCL or PostScript
printing
Paper Type Various paper
types
Sets the default paper type for PCL or PostScript
printing
81
PDL Print Configuration
option
Available
settings
Description
Orientation Portrait Sets the default orientation for PCL or PostScript
printing
Landscape
Quality Draft Sets the quality for PCL or PostScript printing
Standard
Best
Ink Save Mode On/Off Saves ink by reducing print density
Print Order Last Page on
Top
Starts printing from the first page of a file
First Page on
Top
Starts printing from the last page of a file
Number of Copies 1 to 999 Selects the number of copies to print
Binding Margin Left Edge Specifies the binding edge for double-sided documents
Top Edge
Auto Paper Ejection On/Off Ejects paper automatically when printing is stopped
during a print job
2-Sided Printing On/Off Selects duplex printing
PCL Menu
Font Source Resident Uses a font preinstalled on the printer
Download Uses a font you have downloaded
Font Number 1 to 111 Selects the default font number for the default font
source
Pitch 0.44 to 99.99 cpi Selects the default font pitch if the font is scalable and
fixed-pitch (availability depends on font source and
number settings)
Height 4.00 to 999.75 pt Selects the default font height if the font is scalable and
proportional (availability depends on font source and
number settings)
82
PDL Print Configuration
option
Available
settings
Description
Symbol Set Various Selects the default symbol set. If the selected font is not
available for the selected symbol set, the font source
and number are replaced with IBM-US (the default
setting).
Form 5 to 128 lines Sets the number of lines for the selected paper size and
orientation. Changes the line spacing (VMI) stored in
the printer. Later changes in page size or orientation
cause changes in the Form value based on the stored
VMI.
CR Function CR Selects the carriage return and line feed commands
when printing with a driver from a specific operating
system
CR+LF
LF Function LF
CR+LF
Paper Source Assign 4 Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 4
4K Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 4000, 5000, and 8000
5S Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 5S
PS3 Menu
Error Sheet On/Off Prints a sheet showing the status when errors occur
during PostScript or PDF printing
Coloration Color Selects the color mode for PostScript printing
Mono
Binary On/Off Enable when printing files that contain binary images
(available when the product is connected to the
network). Allows you to print binary images even if the
driver is set to ASCII.
PDF Page Size Various sizes Selects the paper size when printing a PDF file. If Auto
is selected, the paper size is determined based on the
size of the first page.
83
Parent topic: Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
You can select printer language and interface settings using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings.
3. To change interface settings, scroll down and select the interface options for your connection type.
4. To select printer language settings, select Printing Language and select the printing language for
your connection type.
5. When you are finished, press the home button to exit.
Printing Language and Interface Options
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Printing Language and Interface Options
Select the printing language and interface options you want to use.
Option Available
settings
Description
PC Connection via USB Enable Select whether to allow USB communication with the
product
Disable
USB I/F Timeout Setting 0.5 to 300
seconds
Specify the length of time before ending USB
communication from a computer using the PCL or
PostScript driver. This setting is necessary to avoid
endless USB communication.
Printing Language Auto Select the language for the USB or network interface
PCL
PS3
PDF
84
Parent topic: Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
Printing a PCL or PS (PostScript) Status Sheet
You can print a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) status sheet to confirm the current font information.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings.
3. Scroll down and select Print Status/Print.
4. Select Print Status Sheet.
5. Select PCL Font List or PS Font List.
6. Select Print to print the status sheet.
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
85
Loading Paper
Before you print, load paper for the type of printing you will do.
Loading Paper in the Cassette and Rear Paper Feed Slot
Paper Loading Capacity
Double-sided Printing Paper Types
Compatible Epson Papers
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Loading Paper in the Cassette and Rear Paper Feed Slot
You can load paper up to Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) or A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm]) in the standard and optional paper cassettes. The paper tray can accommodate user-
defined paper sizes from 2.2 × 5.0 inches (55 × 127 mm) to 12.95 × 47.2 inches (329 × 1200 mm) for
single-sided printing.
You can view instructions on how to load paper in the cassettes or paper tray on the control panel.
Note: If the optional paper cassette units are installed, do not remove more than one cassette at a time.
1. Select the icon on the LCD screen.
2. Select How To > Load paper.
3. Select one of the options.
4. Select How To.
5. Select the icon to scroll through the paper loading instructions.
Caution: Slowly open and close the paper cassettes. Do not let the paper's edge slide across your
skin because the edge of the paper may cut you.
86
6. If necessary, select Close and then select the Paper Setting button and select the size and type
of paper you loaded on the LCD screen.
Note: If the Paper Size Auto Detect setting is enabled, your product will automatically detect the
size of the paper you loaded. To select a user-defined paper size, disable the Paper Size Auto
Detect setting.
Always follow these paper loading guidelines:
• Load only the recommended number of sheets.
• Fan and align the edges of the paper or envelopes before loading.
• Load letterhead or pre-printed paper top edge first.
• Do not load paper above the arrow mark inside the edge guides.
• Insert and remove paper cassettes slowly.
• Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions.
Caution: Do not use the following papers; they may cause paper jams, smears on the printout, or
damage to the printer.
• Papers that are wavy or damp
• Papers that have not dried after printing on one side
• Papers that are wadded or curled
• Papers that are torn, cut, or folded
• Papers that are too thick or thin
• Preprinted papers printed by other inkjet printers, thermal transfer printers, page printers, or copiers
• Papers that are perforated
• Papers that have stickers
• Papers held together with tape, staples, or paper clips
• Envelopes with adhesive surfaces or windows
Note: Store paper flat in its packaging or a plastic bag to avoid absorbing moisture. Store paper in a
location with low humidity and away from direct sunlight. Do not store paper vertically and do not get the
paper wet.
87
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Related references
Paper Specifications
Paper Loading Capacity
Paper Loading Capacity
Paper Cassettes
The table below shows the paper cassette capacity for paper in the following sizes unless noted
otherwise:
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]), Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm]), 8.5 × 13
inches (216 × 330 mm), Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]), 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
• A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]), A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
• B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]), B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
• Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm]), Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]), B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm]), Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5
inches [140 × 216 mm]), 13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm) (for C1 only)
• User-defined (3.9 × 5.8 inches to 11.7 × 17.0 inches [100 × 148 mm to 297 × 431.8 mm]) (for C1 only)
• User-defined (5.8 × 8.3 inches to 11.7 × 17.0 inches [148 × 210 mm to 297 × 431.8 mm]) (for C2-C4
only)
Paper type Loading capacity
Plain paper
Pre-printed paper
Letterhead paper
Colored paper
Recycled paper
High quality plain paper
Thin paper (14 to 16 lb [52 to
59 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide:
• 250 sheets (for C1 only)
• 500 sheets (for C2-C4 only)
88
Paper type Loading capacity
Epson Bright White Premium
Paper
Epson Bright White Pro Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus
Paper
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]):
• 250 sheets (for C1 only)
• 500 sheets (for C2-C4 only)
Paper Tray
The table below shows the paper tray capacity for paper in the following sizes unless noted otherwise.
Note: For paper longer than 17 inches (431.9 mm), load one sheet at a time.
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]), Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm]), Half Letter
(5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm]), Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm]), 11 × 17 inches
(279 × 432 mm)
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]), A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm]), A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm]), B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]), B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches
[353 × 250 mm])
• Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm]), Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
• 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
• User-defined (3.9 × 5.8 inches to 11.7 × 17.0 inches [100 × 148 mm to 297 × 431.8 mm])
• User-defined (5.8 × 8.3 inches to 11.7 × 17.0 inches [148 × 210 mm to 297 × 431.8 mm])
• User-defined (2.2 × 5.0 inches to 12.95 × 47.2 inches [55 × 127 mm to 329 × 1200 mm])
89
Paper type Loading capacity
Plain paper
Pre-printed paper
Letterhead paper
Colored paper
Recycled paper
Thin paper (14 to 16 lb [52 to
59 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (100
sheets)
Epson Bright White Premium
Paper
Epson Bright White Pro Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus
Paper
85 sheets:
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Envelopes 10
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Related references
Paper Specifications
Double-sided Printing Paper Types
You can print double-sided on the following papers:
• Plain paper
• Pre-printed paper
• Letterhead paper
• Colored paper
• Recycled paper
• High quality plain paper
• Thick paper 25 to 68 lb (91 to 256 g/m
2
)
• Epson Bright White Premium Paper
• Epson Bright White Pro Paper
90
• Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper
Note: You can print double-sided on any supported sizes except the following:
• 13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm)
• Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
• B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
To print double-sided with a user-defined size, the dimensions of the paper must have a width between
5.8 and 8.27 inches (148 to 210 mm) and a length between 11.7 and 17.0 inches (297 to 431.8 mm).
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Related tasks
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
Compatible Epson Papers
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales),
epson.ca (Canadian sales), or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies
from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the
U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Note: Paper/media availability varies by country.
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet count
Epson Bright White Pro Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041586 500
91
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet count
Epson Presentation Paper Matte Legal (8.5 × 14 inches
[216 × 356 mm])
S041067 100
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041062 100
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041069-L 100
11 × 17 inches
(279 × 432 mm)
S041070 100
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) S041467 50
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041257
S042180
50
100
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041263 50
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041260 50
Epson Photo Paper Glossy 4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) S041809
S042038
50
100
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041141
S041649
S041271
20
50
100
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm])
S041140 20
11 × 17 inches
(279 × 432 mm)
S041156 20
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041143 20
92
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet count
Epson Premium Photo Paper
Glossy
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) S041727 100
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm) S041464 20
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) S041465 20
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042183
S041667
25
50
11 × 17 inches
(279 × 432 mm)
S041290 20
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041288 20
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041289 20
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper
Glossy
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) S042181
S042174
60
100
5 × 7 inches (127 × 178 mm) S041945 20
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) S041946 20
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S042182
S042175
25
50
Epson Premium Photo Paper
Semi-gloss
4 × 6 inches (102 × 152 mm) S041982 40
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041331 20
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041327 20
Parent topic: Loading Paper
93
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
For this paper Select this Paper Type or Media Type setting
Plain paper
Epson Bright White Premium Paper
Epson Bright White Pro Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper
Plain Paper / Bright White Paper
Letterhead paper Letterhead
Recycled paper Recycled
Colored paper Color
Pre-printed paper Preprinted
High-quality plain paper High Quality Plain Paper
Envelopes Envelope
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Premium Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Photo Paper Glossy Photo Paper Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss Premium Photo Paper Semi-Gloss
Epson Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Thick paper (25 to 40 lb [91 to 150 g/m
2
]) Card Stock 1
Thick paper (41 to 53 lb [151 to 200 g/m
2
]) Card Stock 2
Thick paper (54 to 68 lb [201 to 256 g/m
2
]) Card Stock 3
Note: The settings listed here are available only when printing from your computer; they do not apply to
your product's control panel settings.
Parent topic: Loading Paper
94
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
You can change the default paper size and paper type for each source using the control panel on the
product.
1. Press the Paper Setting button.
2. Select the paper source you want to select settings for.
3. Select Paper Size.
4. Select the paper size you loaded.
5. Select Paper Type.
6. Select the paper type for the paper you loaded.
7. Turn on the Paper Size Auto Detect setting to automatically detect the size of the paper loaded in
the paper source.
8. Select another paper source to change or press the home button to exit.
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Select a Paper Type setting that matches the paper you loaded.
Paper type loaded Paper Type setting
Plain paper
Epson Bright White Premium Paper
Epson Bright White Pro Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper
Plain Paper
Letterhead paper Letterhead
Recycled paper Recycled
Colored paper Color
Pre-printed paper Preprinted
High-quality plain paper High Quality Plain Paper
Envelopes Envelope
95
Paper type loaded Paper Type setting
Epson Ultra Premium Photo Paper Glossy Ultra Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Glossy Prem. Glossy
Epson Photo Paper Glossy Glossy
Epson Premium Photo Paper Semi-gloss Prem. Semi-Gloss
Epson Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Prem. Matte
Thick paper up to 25 to 40 lb (91 to 150 g/m
2
) Card Stock 1
Thick paper up to 41 to 53 lb (151 to 200 g/m
2
) Card Stock 2
Thick paper up to 54 to 68 lb (201 to 256 g/m
2
) Card Stock 3
Parent topic: Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
As an administrator, you can adjust default paper settings that apply to all print jobs sent to the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
Selecting the Default Printer Settings
Selecting the Universal Print Settings
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Selecting the Default Printer Settings
You can change default printer settings using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select General Settings.
96
4. Select Printer Settings.
5. Select one of these options for the Auto Error Solver setting:
• Turn on this setting to display a warning and print single-sided when a 2-sided printing error
occurs, or to print only what the printer could process when a full memory error occurs.
• Turn off this setting to display an error message and stop printing if an error occurs.
6. Select Paper Source Settings.
7. Select the Paper Source Settings options you want to use.
8. When you are finished, press the home button to exit.
Paper Source Settings Options
Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Paper Source Settings Options
Select the paper source options you want to use for your print jobs.
Paper Source
Settings option
Available settings Description
Paper Setting Various Select the paper size and type for each paper source
A4/Letter Auto
Switching
On Select On to switch the selected paper size to match the
loaded paper (Letter or A4) if the wrong size is selected
Off
Auto Select
Settings
Available paper
sources
Select On for any of these settings to automatically print on
paper from any source containing paper that matches your
paper settings
Note: More than one paper source needs to be set to On.
Error Notice Paper Size Notice Select On for either of these settings to display an error
message when the selected paper type or size does not
match the loaded paper
Paper Type Notice
Paper Setup
Auto Display
On Select On to automatically display a menu that lets you
select the paper size and type when you load paper in the
product
Off
User-Defined
Paper Size List
Various Enter a user-defined paper size setting
97
Parent topic: Selecting the Default Printer Settings
Selecting the Universal Print Settings
You can change the default universal print settings using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Universal Print Settings.
3. Adjust the settings as necessary.
4. When you are finished, press the home button to exit.
Universal Print Settings Options
Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Universal Print Settings Options
Select the universal print setting options you want to use for your print jobs.
Universal Print
Settings option
Available settings Description
Top Offset — Adjust the top or left margin
Left Offset
Top Offset in
Back
— Adjust the top or left margin of the back page when printing
double-sided
Left Offset in
Back
Check Paper
Width
On Select On to check the paper width before printing. This
prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper when the
paper size settings are incorrect, but may reduce the
printing speed.
Off
Skip Blank Page On Select On to skip printing of blank pages automatically
Off
99
Placing Originals on the Product
Follow the instructions here to place your original documents or photos on the product.
Caution: Do not place anything on top of your product or use its cover as a writing surface to avoid
damaging it.
Note: If Auto Detect is selected as the paper size setting, the scanner glass and ADF should
automatically detect the size of your original. The size of originals that are ripped, folded, wrinkled,
curled, or glossy, or transparencies or originals with lots of holes may not be correctly detected. If the
document size isn't detected, you need to manually select it on the control panel.
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
You can place originals up to this size on the scanner glass: Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) or
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]).
Note: When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in
the ADF.
1. Press the help button and select How To > Place Originals > Scanner Glass.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution: Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when opening or closing the document cover.
Do not push down on the document cover or scanner glass or you may damage the product.
Note: If there is any dust or dirt on the scanner glass, the scanning range may expand to include it,
so the image of the original may be displaced or reduced. Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to remove any
dust and dirt on the scanner glass before scanning. When placing bulky originals such as books,
prevent exterior light from shining directly onto the scanner glass.
Note: The edges of your original may be cropped by 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) from the edge of the
scanner glass. Manually position your original away from the edges to prevent cropping.
100
Note: Do not press with too much force on the original; otherwise, blurring, smudges, and spots may
occur. If the original has folds or wrinkles, smooth them out before loading it on the scanner glass.
Images may be blurry at the parts where the original is not in close contact with the scanner glass.
Remove your originals after scanning. If you leave the originals on the scanner glass for a long time, they
may stick to the glass surface.
Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
You can place single- or multi-page original documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). You
can also use the ADF to scan both sides of a 2-sided document. Make sure the originals meet the
Automatic Document Feeder specifications before loading them.
Caution: Do not load the following types of originals in the ADF, or they may be damaged or may
damage the scanner. Use the scanner glass for these types:
• Ripped, curled, folded, deteriorated, or wrinkled originals
• Originals with holes
• Originals containing staples or paper clips
• Originals with carbon paper backing
• Originals with labels, stickers, or sticky notes
• Originals that are bound
• Originals that are cut irregularly or not cut at a right angle
• Photos or valuable artwork
• Thermal paper
• Transparencies
• Fabric or other non-paper originals
• Originals with uneven surfaces, such as embossed documents
• Originals with wet ink
Note: When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in
the ADF.
101
Note: Do not load originals above the line under the triangle symbol on the ADF edge guide. Do not load
originals while scanning.
1. Select the help icon and select How To > Place Originals > ADF.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note: Place the long edge of the original toward the paper feed entrance of the ADF.
Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product
102
Copying
See the information here to copy documents or photos using your product.
Note: Copies may not be exactly the same size as your originals.
Copying Documents or Photos
Copying Options
Copying Documents or Photos
You can copy documents or photos onto various sizes and types of paper, including Epson special
papers.
1. Place your original document or photo on the scanner glass, or place multi-page documents in the
ADF.
2. Load the paper you want to print on.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Copy.
5. To print more than one copy, press a number key on the product's control panel, or select Copies
and use the displayed keypad to enter the number of copies.
6. Change any of the displayed settings as necessary.
7. Select Advanced to view and change additional copy settings, if necessary.
8. Select Preview to preview your copy on the LCD screen.
9. Select Presets to save your copy settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you can't access or change this setting, contact
your administrator for assistance.
10. When you are ready to copy, press the Copy icon.
Note: To cancel printing, press the stop button or select Cancel.
Parent topic: Copying
103
Related references
Copying Options
Related tasks
Using Presets
Related topics
Loading Paper
Placing Originals on the Product
Copying Options
Select the copying options you want to use for your copies.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on other copying settings.
Basic Settings
Copying option Available settings Description
B&W — Copies the document in black and white
Color — Copies the document in color
Density Varying levels Adjusts the lightness or darkness of copies
Paper Setting Various sources Select the paper source that you want to use. If you select
Auto, paper is fed automatically depending on the paper
settings you selected for the paper sources.
Reduce/Enlarge Reduce to Fit Paper Automatically decreases the size of the image by the
percentage you select
100% Copies the original at its full size
Auto Automatically sizes the image to fit the paper size you
selected
50%->200% and
other conversions
Automatically converts from one size to another
Original Type Various types Specifies the document type of your originals and adjusts
the quality of your copies
104
Copying option Available settings Description
2-Sided 1>1-Sided Select to make 2-sided copies. When you select 1>2-Sided
or 2>1-Sided, scroll down and select the orientation and
binding edge for your originals or copies.
2>2-Sided
1>2-Sided
2>1-Sided
Advanced settings
Copying option Available settings Description
Multi-Page Single Page Copies each page of the original onto an individual sheet
2-up Copies multiple page documents onto one sheet. Scroll
down and select the document orientation and layout order
settings as necessary.
4-up
Original Size Various sizes Select the document size of your original . When you select
Auto Detect, the size of your original is automatically
detected. When copying non-standard size originals, select
the size closest to your original.
Finishing Group (Same
Pages)
Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
unordered groups
Collate (Page
Order)
Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
ordered sets
Mixed Size
Originals
Off Select On to copy originals of varying sizes in their original
sizes
On
105
Copying option Available settings Description
Orientation
(Original)
Up Direction Specifies the orientation of your originals
Left Direction
Book>2Pages Off Select On to copy two pages of a book onto separate sheets
of paper
On
Image Quality Various settings Select advanced quality settings such as Saturation and
Sharpness
Binding Margin Off Select On to adjust the margin and orientation of the pages
when copying a book
On
Reduce to Fit
Paper
Off Select On to automatically decrease the image by the
percentage you select
On
Remove Shadow Frame Removes shadows that appear around copies when copying
thick paper
Center Removes shadows that appear in the center of copies when
copying a booklet
Remove Punch
Holes
Off Select On to erase the binding holes on a document. Scroll
down and select the erasing position and orientation for your
originals or copies.
On
ID Card Copy Off Select On to copy both sides of an ID card onto one side of
a sheet of paper. Select the orientation for your originals or
copies.
On
Parent topic: Copying
106
Printing from a Computer
Before printing from your computer, make sure you have set up your product and installed its software
from the Epson website.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website. If you see a Software Update screen, select Enable automatic checking
and click OK. The update scans your system to see if you have the latest product software. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
You can print with the standard Epson printer software using any Windows printing program, as
described in these sections.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
107
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing Automatic Update Options
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use.
Note: You may also need to select More settings, Properties, or Preferences to view your print
settings.
108
You see the Main tab of your printer settings window:
4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on. Select Auto
Select to automatically select the paper source in the paper setting menu on the product.
109
5. Select the size of your document or photo as the Document Size setting.
6. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape.
7. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting. Select Auto Select (plain paper) to
automatically use the paper type selected on the product control panel.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
8. Select the Quality setting that matches the print quality you want to use.
9. Select a Color option:
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
• To print text and graphics in black or shades of gray, select the Black/Grayscale setting.
10. To print on both sides of the paper, select a 2-Sided Printing option and click Settings to select
printing options.
11. To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, or print one image on multiple sheets of paper, select
one of the Multi-Page options and click Layout Order to select the printing options.
12. To print multiple copies and arrange their print order, select the Copies, Reverse Order, and
Collate options.
13. To preview your job before printing, select the Print Preview checkbox.
14. To save your print job as a project that can be modified and combined with other print jobs, select
Job Arranger Lite.
Paper Source Options - Windows
Print Quality Options - Windows
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Paper Source Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
110
Note: Paper Cassette 2 through Paper Cassette 4 are available only if you have installed the optional
cassettes.
Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size.
Paper Cassette 1
Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 2
Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 3
Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 4
Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source.
Rear Paper Feed Slot
Selects the paper in the rear feed slot as the paper source.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Print Quality Options - Windows
You can select any of the available Quality options to fine-tune the quality of your print. Some settings
may be unavailable, depending on the paper type and border setting you have chosen.
Draft
For draft printing on plain paper.
Standard
For everyday text and image printing.
High
For photos and graphics with high print quality.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Multi-Page menu to set up your multi-page print job.
2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up
Prints several pages on one sheet of paper. Click the Layout Order button to select page layout and
border options.
111
2×1 Poster, 2×2 Poster, 3×3 Poster, 4×4 Poster
Prints one image on multiple sheets of paper to create a larger poster. Click the Settings button to
select image layout and guideline options.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting one of the 2-Sided Printing options on the Main tab.
Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen
or if you are accessing the product over a network.
1. Select one of the following options for 2-Sided Printing:
• Auto (Long-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper
on the long edge.
• Auto (Short-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper
on the short edge.
2. Click the Settings button.
112
You see a window like this:
3. Select the double-sided printing options you want to use.
4. Click OK to return to the Main tab.
5. Click the Print Density button.
113
You see this window:
6. Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting. The software
automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type.
7. Click OK to return to the Main tab.
8. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings.
9. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing.
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows
Print Density Adjustments - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Related references
Double-sided Printing Paper Types
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options on the Binding Settings window to set up your double-sided
print job.
114
Binding Edge Options
Select a setting that orients double-sided print binding in the desired direction.
Binding Margin Options
Select options that define a wider margin to allow for binding.
Start Page
Selects whether printing starts on the front or back page.
Create Folded Booklet Options
Select the Booklet checkbox and a binding option to print double-sided pages as a booklet.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Print Density Adjustments - Windows
You can select any of the available options on the Print Density Adjustment window to adjust the print
quality of your double-sided print job.
Print Density
Sets the level of ink coverage for double-sided printing.
Increase Ink Drying Time
Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing
the other side in double-sided printing to prevent ink smearing.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
You can select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo on the More
Options tab.
1. To change the size of your printed document or photo, select the Reduce/Enlarge Document
checkbox and select one of these sizing options:
• Select the Fit to Page option to size your image to fit the paper you loaded. Select the size of your
document or photo as the Document Size setting, and the size of your paper as the Output Paper
setting. If you want to center your image on the paper, select the Center option.
• Select the Zoom to option to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage.
Select the percentage in the % menu.
2. Select one of the following Color Correction options:
• Select Automatic to automatically adjust the sharpness, brightness, contrast, and color saturation
for your image.
115
• Select Custom and click the Advanced button to manually adjust the color correction settings or
turn off color management in your printer software.
• Select Image Options to access additional settings for improving printed images.
Note: You can also select Color Universal Print settings.
3. To add the following features, click the Watermark Features button:
• Anti-Copy Pattern: adds a watermark that only appears when your printout is copied
Note: This setting is not available for all types of printing. Click the Add/Delete button to create
your own pattern, and click the Settings button to customize the pattern.
• Watermark: adds a visible watermark to your printout
Note: Click the Add/Delete button to create your own watermark, and click the Settings button to
customize the watermark.
• Header/Footer: adds information such as the date and time to the top or bottom of your printout
Note: Click the Settings button to customize the text and location of the header or footer.
4. To add a password to your print job, select the Confidential Job checkbox, then enter a password.
Confidential jobs are stored in the product's memory without being printed. To print the job, enter the
password for the confidential job on the product's control panel.
Note: Confidential print jobs are cleared from the product's memory after printing.
5. Select any of the Additional Settings options to customize your print.
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
Header/Footer Settings - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Related tasks
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
116
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Color Correction window to customize the image colors
for your print job.
Color Controls
Lets you select a Color Mode setting, individual settings for Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and
Density, and individual color tones. Depending on the selected color mode, you can also adjust the
midtone density using the Gamma setting.
Fix Photo
Improves the color, contrast, and sharpness of flawed photos.
Note: Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include
faces. For this to work, both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject's face. If your photo
includes a face with an intentional color cast, such as a statue, you may want to turn off Fix Photo to
retain the special color effects.
117
ICM
Lets you manage color using installed color printing profiles.
No Color Adjustment
Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your
application software.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
You can select any of the Image Options and Additional Settings to customize your print. Some options
may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Image Options
Emphasize Text
Adjusts the weight of printed text to increase readability.
Emphasize Thin Lines
Adjusts the weight of printed lines to increase visibility.
Edge Smoothing
Smooths jagged edges in low-resolution images such as screen captures or images from the Web.
Fix Red-Eye
Reduces or removes red-eye in photos.
Print Text in Black
Prints colored text in black.
For Color Text
Prints colored text on a background pattern or underlined.
For Color Graphs and Images
Prints colored graphics and images with overlay patterns.
For Color Text, Graphs, and Images
Prints colored text, graphics, and images with overlay patterns.
Enhancement Options
Specifies Color Universal Print enhancement settings for text, graphics, and images.
Additional Settings Options
Rotate 180º
Prints the image rotated 180º from its original orientation.
118
Bidirectional Printing
Prints in both directions (right-to-left and left-to-right), speeding up printing, but may reduce print
quality.
Mirror Image
Flips the printed image left to right.
Quiet Mode
Lessens noise during printing but may decrease print speed.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Header/Footer Settings - Windows
You can select any of the Header/Footer Settings options to add headers or footers when you print. The
items are available to print at the top or bottom of your pages, in either the left, right, or center of the
page.
119
Note: These settings are not saved with your document.
You can select to print the following information:
• User Name
• Computer Name
• Date
• Date/Time
• Document Name
• Collate Number
120
• Page Number
Note: To specify the first page number, select Page Number from the position you want to print in the
header or footer, then select the number in Starting number.
• Text
You can also adjust the text settings for the printed information.
Note: The user name, computer name, date, and time come from the Windows Control Panel on your
computer.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows
For quick access to common groups of print settings, you can select a printing preset on the Main or
More Options tab.
Note: You can create your own preset by clicking the Add/Remove Presets button.
1. Click the Main or More Options tab.
121
You see the available Printing Presets on the left:
2. Place your cursor over one of the Printing Presets to view its list of settings.
3. Click on a preset to change its settings or delete it, or use any of the available options on the screen
to control your printing presets.
4. To choose a preset for printing, select it.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
122
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
You can select additional settings that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Printer Settings.
3. Click the Maintenance tab.
You see the maintenance options:
4. Click the Extended Settings button.
123
You see this window:
5. Select any of the extended settings to customize your print.
6. Click OK to close the Extended Settings window.
7. Click OK to close the printer software window.
Extended Settings - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Extended Settings - Windows
You can select these settings on the Extended Settings window.
Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3
Enables product monitoring for ink and paper supplies and other issues.
Check Paper Width Before Printing
Prevents printing beyond the edges of the paper if the paper size setting is incorrect; may reduce print
speed.
Thick Paper and Envelopes
Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
Short Grain Paper
Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper, and the Thick Paper
setting does not help.
124
Separator Page
Before each document, prints a separator page containing the title, user, date, and time.
Always Spool RAW Datatype
Increases print speed and may solve other printing problems.
Page Rendering Mode
Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing.
Print as Bitmap
Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing, and
other settings do not help.
Skip Blank Page
Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Change Standard Resolution
Reduces the resolution of print data to correct printing problems.
Refine screening pattern
Prints graphics with a finer screening pattern.
Allow Applications to Perform ICM Color Matching
Allows applications to perform ICM color matching.
Always Use the Driver's Paper Source Setting
Prints using the paper source setting in the printer driver, rather than the setting in your application.
Output 1 page documents facedown in 2-Sided mode
Outputs single-sided pages in a 2-sided print job facedown instead of faceup.
Output documents for filing
Outputs all landscape, portrait, 1-sided, and 2-sided documents in the same orientation for easier
filing.
Barcode mode
Reduces bleeding when printing barcodes on plain paper, letterhead paper, recycled paper,
preprinted paper, envelopes, and thick paper.
Always Use the Driver's Color Setting
Prioritizes color settings from the printer driver software.
Reduce Print Data Size
Increases print data compression to improve print speed. Not recommended when printing fine
patterns.
Print a document with both single-sided and double-sided pages
Prints an entire document that contains both single- and double-sided pages.
125
Parent topic: Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Printing Your Document or Photo - Windows
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to save your settings and print.
1. Click OK to save your settings.
You see your application's Print window, such as this one:
2. Click OK or Print to start printing.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Windows administrators can lock access to some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name and select Printer properties.
126
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select
Printer properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
Note: You can prevent access to the Optional Settings tab by changing the user or group
permissions in the Security tab.
3. Click Driver Settings.
You see a window like this:
4. Select the checkbox for each setting you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All Document
Settings.
127
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting option you want to use for each locked setting.
6. Click OK.
Locked Setting Options
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Locked Setting Options
Select the options you want to use for any locked print settings.
Setting Options Description
Anti-Copy
Pattern
Various data items Lets you select the data to use for the pattern or prohibit anti-
copy patterns
Add/Delete Lets you add or delete a customized anti-copy pattern
Settings Lets you select the arrangement, size, and other settings for
the custom anti-copy pattern
Watermark Various text
watermarks
Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit
watermarks
Add/Delete Lets you add or delete a customized text or image-based
watermark
Settings Lets you select the size, position, and other watermark
settings
Header/Footer Off Prohibits headers or footers
On Allows headers and footers
Settings Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and
footers
Color Color Allows color printing
Grayscale Allows printing in black or shades of gray only
2-sided printing Off Allows printing on one side of the paper only
On Allows printing on both sides of the paper
128
Setting Options Description
Multi-Page Off Prohibits multi-page settings
2-Up Allows printing of 2 pages on one sheet of paper
4-Up Allows printing of 4 pages on one sheet of paper
6-Up Allows printing of 6 pages on one sheet of paper
8-Up Allows printing of 8 pages on one sheet of paper
9-Up Allows printing of 9 pages on one sheet of paper
16-Up Allows printing of 16 pages on one sheet of paper
Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
If you enabled Access Control on the product, you must enter a user ID and password in the printer
driver to be able to print.
Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
129
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . Select Printer Settings and click the
Maintenance tab.
2. Click the Printer and Option Information button.
3. Select the Save Access Control settings checkbox.
4. Click the Settings button.
5. Enter your user name and password.
6. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
130
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Printer Settings.
You see a printer settings window like this:
3. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
4. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
131
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
You can change the language used on the Windows printer software screens.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Printer Settings.
You see the printer settings window.
3. Click the Maintenance tab.
You see the maintenance options:
4. Select the language you want to use as the Language setting.
132
5. Click OK to close the printer software window.
The printer software screens appear in the language you selected the next time you access them.
Parent topic: Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing Automatic Update Options
Your printer software for Windows automatically checks for updates to the product software. You can
change how often the software checks for updates or disable this feature.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Software Update Settings.
You see a window like this:
3. Do one of the following:
• To change how often the software checks for updates, select a setting in the Check every menu.
• To disable the automatic update feature, select the Never option.
4. Click OK to exit.
Note: If you choose to disable the automatic update feature, you can check for updates manually.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
133
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
You can print with your product using any Mac printing program, as described in these sections.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
Managing Color - Mac
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Related tasks
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
134
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
You see the expanded printer settings window for your product:
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and the application
you are using.
135
5. Select the Copies and Pages settings as necessary.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing.
6. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
7. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image
above for the Preview application.
8. Select Print Settings or Printer Features from the pop-up menu.
136
You see these settings:
9. Select the Paper Source you wish to print from.
10. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Media Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
11. Select the Print Quality setting you want to use.
12. Select any of the available print options.
Paper Source Options - Mac
Print Quality Options - Mac
Print Options - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Paper Source Options - Mac
You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size.
Cassette 1
Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source.
137
Cassette 2
Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source.
Cassette 3
Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source.
Cassette 4
Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source.
Rear Paper Feed Slot
Selects the paper in the rear feed slot as the paper source.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Print Quality Options - Mac
You can select any of the available Print Quality options to fine-tune the quality of your print. Some
settings may be unavailable, depending on the paper type setting you have chosen.
Draft
For draft printing on plain paper.
Normal
For everyday text and image printing.
Fine
For text and graphics with good quality and print speed.
Best Quality
For the best print quality, but the slowest print speed.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Print Options - Mac
You can select any of the print options to customize your print. Some options may be unavailable,
depending on other settings you have chosen.
Grayscale
Prints text and graphics in black or shades of gray.
Mirror Image
Lets you flip the printed image horizontally.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
138
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac
Depending on your application, you may be able to select the paper size and orientation settings from
the print window.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
1. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting.
2. Select the orientation of your document or photo as shown in the print window.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select the icon or Landscape setting.
Note: You can reduce or enlarge the size of the printed image by selecting Paper Handling from the
pop-up menu and selecting a scaling option.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
139
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac
You can select a variety of layout options for your document or photo by selecting Layout from the pop-
up menu on the print window.
• To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, select the number of pages in the Pages per Sheet
pop-up menu. To arrange the print order of the pages, select a Layout Direction setting.
• To print borders around each page on the sheet, select a line setting from the Border pop-up menu.
• To print on both sides of each page, select a setting from the Two-Sided pop-up menu.
• To invert or flip the printed image, select the Reverse page orientation or Flip horizontally settings.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting Two-sided Printing Settings from the pop-up
menu on the print window.
Note: For macOS 13 and later, select Printer Options then select Two-sided Printing Settings.
140
Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen
or if you are accessing the product over a network. This screen may be different, depending on the Mac
OS version you are using.
1. Select one of the Two-sided Printing options.
2. Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting. The software
automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type.
3. If necessary, customize the Adjustments settings as instructed on the screen.
4. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings.
5. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing.
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
141
Related references
Double-sided Printing Paper Types
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac
You can select any of the available options in the Two-sided Printing Settings pop-up menu to set up
your double-sided print job.
Long-Edge binding
Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the long edge of the paper.
Short-Edge binding
Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the short edge of the paper.
Print Density
Sets the level of ink coverage for double-sided printing.
Increased Ink Drying Time
Sets the amount of time required for drying ink after printing on one side of the paper before printing
the other side in double-sided printing.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
Managing Color - Mac
You can adjust the Color Matching and Color Options settings to fine-tune the colors in your printout or
turn off color management in your printer software.
1. Select Color Matching from the pop-up menu in the print window.
Note: For macOS 13 and later, select Printer Options then select Color Matching.
2. Select one of the available options.
142
3. Select Color Options from the pop-up menu in the print window.
Note: For macOS 13 and later, select Printer Options then select Color Options.
Note: The available settings on the Color Options menu depend on the option you selected on the
Color Matching menu.
4. Select one of the available options.
Color Matching and Color Options - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Color Matching and Color Options - Mac
You can select these settings on the Color Matching and Color Options menus.
Color Matching Settings
EPSON Color Controls
Lets you manage color using controls in your printer driver or turn off color management.
ColorSync
Prints using standard color profiles for your product and paper to help match image colors. You can
customize the conversion method and filter settings on the ColorSync pop-up menu in the print
window.
Color Options Settings
Manual Settings
Lets you select manual color adjustments. Click the arrow next to Advanced Settings and select
settings for Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and individual color tones. You can also select a color
Mode setting for printing photos and graphics and the Fix Red-Eye setting to reduce or remove red-
eye in photos. Depending on the selected color mode, you can also adjust the midtone density using
the Gamma setting.
143
Fix Photo
Improves the color, contrast, and sharpness of flawed photos. Click the arrow next to Advanced
Settings and select the Fix Red-Eye setting to reduce or remove red-eye in photos.
Note: Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include
faces. For this to work, both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject's face. If your photo
includes a face with an intentional color cast, such as a statue, you may want to turn off Fix Photo to
retain the special color effects.
Off (No Color Adjustment)
Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your
application software.
Note: An ICC profile is required if color management is turned off.
Parent topic: Managing Color - Mac
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
You can select printing preferences that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings.
2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
3. Select Driver or Options.
144
You see a screen like this:
Note: The available settings and appearance of the options window may be different than those
covered here, depending on the Mac OS version and the application you are using.
4. Select any of the available printing preferences.
5. Click OK.
Printing Preferences - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Printing Preferences - Mac
You can select these settings on the Options or Driver tab.
Thick Paper and Envelopes
Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
Skip Blank Page
Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Quiet Mode
Lessens noise during printing but may decrease print speed.
Permit temporary black printing
Allows you to print using black ink when color ink is expended.
145
Bidirectional printing
Prints in both directions (right-to-left and left-to-right), speeding up printing, but may reduce print
quality.
Output documents for filing
Outputs all landscape, portrait, 1-sided, and 2-sided documents in the same orientation for easier
filing.
Warning Notifications
Lets you choose whether or not to receive warning notifications from the printer software for various
operating conditions.
Establish bidirectional communication
Allows the product to communicate with the computer. Do not change the default setting unless you
experience issues when using a shared printing pool.
Reduce Print Data Size
Increases print data compression to improve print speed. Not recommended when printing fine
patterns.
Lower Cassette
Specifies whether the optional cassette is present.
Parent topic: Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to print.
Click Print at the bottom of the print window.
146
Checking Print Status - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Checking Print Status - Mac
During printing, you can view the progress of your print job, control printing, and check ink status.
1. Click the printer icon when it appears in the Dock.
You see the print status window:
2. Select the following options as necessary for your Mac OS version:
• To cancel printing, click the print job and click or Delete.
• To pause a print job, click the print job and click or Hold. To resume a print job, click the
paused print job and click or Resume.
• To pause printing for all queued print jobs, click Pause or Pause Printer.
• To display other printer information, click Settings or Supply Levels.
Parent topic: Printing Your Document or Photo - Mac
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You can print with the Epson Universal Print Driver using any Windows printing program, as described in
these sections.
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
147
Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Adding Network Printers - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You may need to synchronize the printer driver with the product if the printer driver does not detect the
correct information or settings from the product.
Note: You must sync the printer driver before you can use any optional equipment installed on the
product.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click and select Settings > Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners.
Select EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select
EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printer properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
148
You see a window like this:
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get.
Note: Select the Only Optional Information checkbox if you only want to enable any optional
equipment installed on the product.
The product's settings and other information appears in the Current Printer Information area.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Related tasks
Enabling the Optional Paper Cassettes - Windows
149
Selecting Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
Note: The names of settings on the universal print driver screens may vary slightly, depending on the
version of the print driver you have installed.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select EPSON Universal Print Driver as the printer you want to use.
Note: You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings.
150
You see the Main tab of a printer settings window like this:
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
5. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting.
Note: You can also select the User-Defined setting to create a custom paper size.
6. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape.
151
7. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
8. Select any of the available print options.
9. To select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo, select the
More Options tab and select the printing options you want.
10. To select maintenance and other optional settings, select the Maintenance tab and select the
options you want.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select
EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Manage > Printing Preferences.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Print Preferences.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printing Preferences.
• Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver, and select Printing Preferences.
You see the printer settings window:
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
2. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
3. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
152
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Administrators can lock some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click and select Settings > Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners.
Select EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select
EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printer properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
3. Click Driver Settings.
153
You see this window:
4. Select the checkbox for the settings you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All Document
Settings.
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting option you want to use for each locked setting.
6. Click OK.
Epson Universal Print Driver Locked Setting Options
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Epson Universal Print Driver Locked Setting Options
Select the options you want to use for any locked print settings.
154
Setting Options Description
Watermark Various text
watermarks
Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit
watermarks
Add/Delete Lets you add or delete a customized text or image-based
watermark
Settings Lets you select the size, position, and other watermark
settings
Header/Footer Off Prohibits headers or footers
On Allows headers and footers
Settings Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and
footers
Color Color Allows color printing
Grayscale Allows printing in black or shades of gray only
2-sided printing Off Allows printing on only one side of the paper
On Allows printing on both sides of the paper
Multi-Page Off Prohibits multi-page settings
2-Up Allows printing of 2 pages on one sheet of paper
4-Up Allows printing of 4 pages on one sheet of paper
6-Up Allows printing of 6 pages on one sheet of paper
8-Up Allows printing of 8 pages on one sheet of paper
9-Up Allows printing of 9 pages on one sheet of paper
16-Up Allows printing of 16 pages on one sheet of paper
Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Adding Network Printers - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You can use the Epson Universal Print Driver to find and add network printers.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click and select Settings > Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners.
Select EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
155
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select
EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printer properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
You see this window:
3. Click Network printer search.
4. When you see the search results, select Add found printers.
156
You see a screen like this:
5. Select the printer or printers you want to add.
6. Click Add to Printer Folder.
The selected printer or printers appear in the lower section of the screen.
7. Select the checkbox next to the product you want to make your default printer, if necessary.
8. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
157
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any Windows printing program, as
described in these sections.
Note: The PostScript printer software supports products that are connected via Ethernet. If your product
is connected via USB, you will need to install the standard Epson printer software. To download the
standard Epson printer software, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Selecting Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use, and then click the
Preferences or Properties button, depending on the application.
158
You see the Paper/Quality tab of your printer settings window:
4. Select the Paper Source that matches where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
5. Select Plain as the Media setting.
6. Select one of the following as the Color setting:
• To print text and graphics in black only, select the Black & White setting.
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
7. To select additional PostScript layout and printing options, select Advanced and select additional
settings as necessary.
8. Select the Layout tab.
159
You see a screen like this:
9. Select any settings as necessary.
10. If you have set up Access Control or want to print a confidential job, select Extended Settings to
enable printing by entering a user name and password , or print a confidential job by entering the
necessary information.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
160
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printing preferences.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Print Preferences.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select
Printing Preferences.
• Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
right-click your product name, and select Printing Preferences.
2. Click the Layout tab.
You see the printer settings window:
161
3. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
4. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any Mac printing program, as described in
these sections.
Note: The PostScript printer software supports products that are connected via Ethernet. If your product
is connected via USB, you will need to install the standard Epson printer software. To download the
standard Epson printer software, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
The PostScript printer software supports plain paper printing on these paper and envelope sizes:
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
• A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
• B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
• B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
• Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
• 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
162
• 13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm)
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
• Envelope C6 (4.49 × 6.38 inches [114 × 162 mm])
• Envelope DL (4.33 × 8.66 inches [110 × 220 mm])
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
163
You see the expanded printer settings window for your product:
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and the application
you are using.
164
5. Select the Two-Sided, or Double-sided, Copies, and Pages settings as necessary.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing.
6. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
7. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image
above for the Preview application.
8. Select Paper Feed from the Printer Options menu or select Paper Feed from the pop-up menu in
the print window.
You see these settings:
9. Select All Pages From or First Page From and select the paper source you want to print from.
165
10. Select Printer Features from the Printer Options menu or select Printer Features from the pop-up
menu in the print window.
You see these settings:
11. Select a MediaType setting.
12. Select one of the following Print Quality options:
• For fast printing with reduced quality, select Fast.
• For printing text and graphics with good quality and print speed, select Fine.
• For the best printing with reduced speed, select Maximum.
13. Select Color from the Feature Sets pop-up menu.
You see these settings:
14. Select a Color Mode option:
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
• To print text and graphics in black only, select the Monochrome setting.
15. Select any of the following from the pop-up menu as necessary:
• Select Layout to adjust a variety of layout options for your document or photo.
166
• Select Paper Handling to adjust the size of the image as you print it.
• Select Color Matching to fine-tune the colors in your printout. For monochrome printers, this
adjusts the tone and brightness of your printout.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet
You can print from a smartphone or tablet running iOS or Android using the Epson Smart Panel app.
Note: Your device must be connected to the same wireless network as your Epson product, and Epson
Smart Panel must be configured for use with your product.
1. Download the Epson Smart Panel app from your device's app store or from Epson's website.
2. Open the Epson Smart Panel app and select a print menu on the home screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to begin printing.
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button
If you need to cancel printing in progress, press the stop button.
To cancel stored jobs or jobs waiting to print, follow the instructions below.
1. Press the Job/Status button.
2. Select Active on the Job Status tab.
3. Select the job you want to cancel and select Cancel.
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
167
Scanning
You can scan your originals and save them as digital files.
Starting a Scan
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Scanning Special Projects
Starting a Scan
After placing your originals on your product for scanning, start scanning using one of these methods.
Note: You can also scan using Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac).
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program
Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet
Parent topic: Scanning
Related topics
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Placing Originals on the Product
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
You can scan an image to a variety of destinations using your product's control panel.
1. Make sure you installed the product software and connected the product to your computer or
network.
Note: Restart your computer after installing the product software to enable scanning from the control
panel.
168
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place your originals in the ADF.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Scan.
5. Select one of the following Scan to options:
• Network Folder/FTP saves your scan file to a specified folder on a network.
• Email lets you send scanned files through a pre-configured email server.
• Document Capture Pro lets you scan over a network using your saved job settings in Document
Capture Pro or Document Capture.
Note: You cannot use this option to scan an image to Document Capture or Document Capture
Pro when your product is connected to your computer's USB port.
• Memory Device saves your scan file on a USB device inserted in your product's external USB
port and lets you select the file format, quality, and other settings.
• Cloud sends your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with Epson Connect.
• Computer (WSD) lets you manage network scanning in Windows. To use this feature on
Windows 7 or Windows Vista, you must first set up WSD (Web Services for Devices) on the
computer.
6. Follow the instructions in the links below to complete your scan.
Scanning to Email
Scanning to a Memory Device
Scanning to the Cloud
Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7)
Control Panel Scanning Options
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Related tasks
Scanning to the Cloud
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Using Presets
169
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Scanning to Email
You can scan an original and email the scanned file using your product's control panel. You need to
have a preconfigured email server before you can scan to email. You can either enter the email address
directly on the product's control panel or select an address from the Contacts list. Make sure the date
and time are set correctly so the time stamps on your emails are accurate.
Note: You can also use the Scan to Document Capture Pro function to scan and email the scanned file.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan > Email.
4. Do one of the following:
• Select from any displayed frequent contacts.
• Select Keyboard to use the displayed keyboard to enter the address for the recipient and select
OK.
• Select Contacts and choose an email address from the list.
• Select History to choose an email address from your recent scan history.
5. Select Scan Settings.
6. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan.
7. Scroll down and change the Subject and File Name settings, if necessary.
8. Select any additional scan settings as necessary.
9. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
10. Press the Send icon.
Your product scans your original and emails the scanned file.
170
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Scanning to a Memory Device
You can scan an original and save the scanned image to a external USB device connected to your
product.
1. Insert a external USB device into the product's USB port.
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Scan > Memory Device.
5. Select Basic Settings options as necessary.
6. Select the Advanced tab and select options as necessary.
7. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
8. Select the Save icon.
Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to a memory device.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Scanning to the Cloud
You can use the control panel to send your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with
Epson Connect.
Note: Make sure to set up your product using Epson Connect before using this feature.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan > Cloud.
171
4. Press the + icon and select a cloud destination.
5. Select Basic Settings options as necessary.
6. Select the Advanced tab and select options as necessary.
7. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
8. Press the Upload icon.
Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to the selected destination.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7)
You can scan to a networked Windows computer using WSD (Web Services for Devices). You must first
set up a WSD port on your Windows 7 system (the port is set up automatically on Windows 11, Windows
10, and Windows 8.x).
Before you set up a WSD port, make sure you installed your product software, and connected your
product and computer to the same network.
1. Turn on your product.
2. Print a network status sheet so you can identify the network name and model name for your product
on the network.
3. Click and select Computer.
4. On the left side of the window, select Network.
5. Locate your product on the Network screen, right-click it, and select Install.
6. When you see the User Account Control screen, click Continue.
Note: If you see an Uninstall screen, click Uninstall and repeat these steps as necessary.
7. When you see the message Your device is ready to use in the Windows taskbar, click the
message.
8. On the Driver Software Installation screen, make sure your product is listed as Ready to use. Then
click Close.
9. Click and select Devices and Printers.
172
10. Make sure that an icon appears for your product's name on the network.
When you use WSD, select your product name to scan over the network.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Control Panel Scanning Options
Select the options you want to use for scanning.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the Scan to option selected.
Scan Settings Available options Description
Color Mode B&W Select to scan images in black and white
Color Select to scan images in color
File Format JPEG Select for photos. You can also select the
Compression Ratio.
PDF (Single Page) Select for documents. You can also select the
Compression Ratio and PDF Settings.
PDF (Multi Page)
PDF/A (Single Page)
PDF/A (Multi Page)
TIFF (Single Page) Select for scanned files that you can print from a
device. Multi Page TIFF documents are scanned
in black and white.
TIFF (Multi Page)
Resolution 200dpi Select for documents
300dpi Select for photos
600dpi Select for highest quality printing
2-Sided 1-Sided Lets you scan 2-sided originals placed in the
ADF. If you select 2-Sided, you can also select
the Binding (Original) setting.
2-Sided
Scan Area Auto Cropping Select to automatically adjust the scan area
Various sizes Select the page size for documents
Max Area Select for most photos
173
Scan Settings Available options Description
Original Type Text Specify the type of original you are scanning
Text & Image
Photo
Orientation (Original) Readable Direction Select the orientation direction for how you
placed the originals
Left Direction
Mixed Size Originals A3 and A4 Select one of the size combinations to place in
the ADF at the same time. When using these
combinations, originals are scanned at the
actual size of the originals. Place your originals
by aligning the width of the originals.
B4 and B5
A4 and A5
Density Varying levels Adjust the lightness or darkness of scanned
images.
Remove Shadow Off Erase the shadows that appear in the center of a
document when copying a book or the shadows
that appear around a document when copying
thick paper
On
Remove Punch Holes Off Erase the binding holes on a document
On
Subject — Enter a subject for your email
Attached File Max Size Various sizes Select the maximum file size that can be
attached to an email
File Name — Enter a prefix, the date, and the time to the file
name for your scanned file
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Before you can scan to a network folder on your computer or on an FTP server, you need to create a
shared folder and optionally register its location to your product's Contacts list. Select the links below as
necessary to create and register the folder, and to scan to it over the network.
Creating a Shared Network Folder
Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config
174
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Creating a Shared Network Folder
You can create a shared network folder on your computer or an FTP site and register its location to your
product's Contacts list.
Note: If you are creating a shared network folder on a Mac, see your Mac documentation for instructions
on creating the folder. The instructions here are for Windows.
First make sure you connected your product and computer to the same network.
Note: If you are running a Home version of the Windows operating system, you cannot create a shared
folder on your Windows desktop or in the Documents or Pictures folder unless you have created a Home
Group Configuration for sharing. You can, however, create a shared folder in the root of the C: drive on
your system.
If you want to scan to a folder on an FTP server, contact the FTP server administrator for the server
address and authentication access to a shared folder on the server.
1. If you are scanning to a network folder on your computer, do one of the following to check the format
of your computer name:
• Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Hold down the Windows key on your keyboard and
press the X key. Select System from the list that appears. Check the Computer Name or Device
Name listed for your computer on the System window.
• Windows 7: Click , right-click Computer, and select Properties. Check the Computer Name
listed for your computer on the System window.
Note: The settings in these steps may vary, depending on your version of Windows. See Windows
Help for details on your operating system.
2. If the computer's name uses any characters that are not alphanumeric (letters or numbers), do one
of the following to change the computer's name:
• Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Select Rename this PC and follow the on-screen
prompts.
175
• Windows 7: Select Change Settings, change the computer's name, and click OK. (See Windows
Help for instructions, if necessary.)
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to change the computer's name.
After changing the name, restart your computer.
3. Click the Windows start button, then select Windows System > Control Panel.
4. On the Control Panel, click Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center > Change
advanced sharing settings.
The network profile is displayed.
Make sure that Turn on file and printer sharing is selected under File and Printer Sharing for the
network profile (current profile). If already selected, click Cancel to close the window.
5. Start File Explorer or Windows Explorer.
6. Create a folder on the Windows desktop with a folder name of 12 characters or less; otherwise, your
product may not be able to access the folder.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to access the desktop folder and the
document folder under each User folder.
7. Right-click the folder you created and select Properties.
8. On the General tab, deselect the Read-only checkbox to allow users to access the folder over the
network.
9. Select the Sharing tab and click the Advanced Sharing button.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to select the Advanced Sharing
button.
10. On the Advanced Sharing screen, select the Share this folder checkbox.
11. Click the Permissions button and select the following on the Share Permissions tab:
• Select Everyone under Group or user names.
• Select the checkbox in the Allow column for the Change setting.
12. Click OK to save the settings, then click OK again to close the Advanced Sharing window.
13. Select the Security tab and check that the Group or user names list at the top includes the current
computer user and the administrators who can now access the folder.
176
14. Select the Sharing tab again and write down the Network Path listed under Network File and Folder
Sharing at the top. This is the path you will register to your product's Contacts list so you can select it
for network scanning.
15. Click OK or Close.
Now you can register the folder path to your product's Contacts list.
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config
You can register a list of contacts for scanning to a network folder or FTP server using Web Config and
your computer's internet browser.
Before you begin, print a network status sheet and locate the IP address for your product on the sheet.
1. Start an internet browser on a computer that is using the same network as your product.
2. Type your product's IP address into the address bar and press Enter.
3. Click Continue to this website (not recommended).
Note: This step may vary depending on the browser version you are using.
4. Log in as an administrator.
5. Click the Scan/Copy tab.
6. Click Contacts.
7. Select an empty number you want to use for the contact you are adding and click Edit.
8. Enter the following information for the contact:
• Name: The name to display in your product's contact list.
• Index Word: Enter a word to identify this entry when searching for it (up to 30 characters). This
field is optional.
• Type: Select Network Folder (SMB), FTP, or SharePoint(WebDAV).
• Assign to Frequent Use: If you want to identify the contact as a frequently used address, select
On. This makes it quicker to select the contact when you scan.
• Save to: The network path to the shared folder.
Enter the folder path name in one of the following formats depending on the Type setting you
selected:
• SMB: host_name\folder
177
• FTP/SharePoint: host_name/folder_name
• Secure Connection: For FTP locations, select the secure connection type.
• User Name and Password: Enter only if you have set up a password on your computer.
• Connection Mode: For FTP locations, select Passive Mode if there is a firewall between the
product and FTP server.
• Port Number: For FTP locations, enter the port number.
• Certificate Validation: For FTP locations, choose to enable or disable an imported certificate.
Note: This setting is only available if you select FTPS as the Secure Connection setting.
9. Click Apply.
After a moment, you see a message telling you that contact registration is complete.
10. Close your web browser.
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel
You can create a list of contacts for scanning to email or to a network folder or FTP.
Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact
your administrator for assistance. You can create up to 2,000 contacts and contact groups combined
(including fax contacts for models with optional fax board installed).
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Contacts Manager.
4. Select Add/Edit/Delete.
5. Select Add New.
6. Select Add Contact.
7. Do one of the following:
• To create a contact for scanning to fax, select Fax (models with optional fax board installed).
• To create a contact for scanning to email, select Email.
• To create a location for scanning to a network folder or FTP, select Network Folder/FTP.
178
8. Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding.
9. Select the Name field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters)
and select OK.
10. Select the Index Word field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters) and select OK. (This field is optional.)
11. Do one of the following:
• For a fax contact (models with optional fax board installed), select the Fax Number field. Use the
displayed keyboard to enter the fax number and select OK.
Select any other fax settings as necessary.
• For an email contact, select the Email Address field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the
address and select OK.
• For a network folder or FTP location, select the Communication Mode field and select Network
Folder (SMB) or FTP. Then select the Location field, use the on-screen keyboard to enter the
location, and select OK. Enter other information if necessary.
Enter the folder path name for the Location setting in one of the following formats depending on
the Communication Mode setting you selected:
• SMB: \\host name\folder
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
12. Select OK.
Note: If you need to edit or delete scanning contacts, the procedures are the same as for fax contacts.
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
You can scan an image and save it to a network folder using your product's control panel. You can either
enter the folder path directly on the product's control panel or select a folder from the Contacts list.
Note: Make sure the date and time are set correctly before using this feature.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place your originals in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
179
3. Select Scan > Network Folder/FTP.
4. Specify the destination by doing one of the following:
• Select from frequently used addresses by choosing a saved location in the Destination tab.
• Enter the folder path directly by selecting Keyboard > Communication Mode, then select the
Location (Required) field and enter the folder location. Enter other information as necessary.
Note: Selecting Browse will search a folder on computers connected to a network. You can only
use Browse when Communication Mode is set to SMB.
Enter the folder path name for the Location (Required) setting in one of the following formats
depending on the Communication Mode setting you selected:
• SMB: \\host name\folder name
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
• FTPS: ftps://host name/folder name
• WebDAV (HTTPS): https://host name/folder name
• WebDAV (HTTP): http://host name/folder name
• Select from the contacts list by selecting Contacts.
5. Select Scan Settings.
6. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan.
7. Scroll down and change the File Name setting, if necessary.
8. Select any additional scan settings as necessary.
9. Select Presets to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
10. Select the Save icon.
Your product scans your original and saves it in the selected location.
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Selecting the Date and Time
180
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
If you enabled Access Control on your product, a user ID and password may be required to scan. You
can enter the user ID and password in Epson Scan 2.
Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Start Epson Scan 2.
2. Select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
You see this window:
3. Select Access Control.
4. Enter your user name and password.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon
You can start the Epson Scan 2 program to select scan settings, scan, and save the scanned image to a
file.
181
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Scan 2 and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Epson Scan 2.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select EPSON
> Epson Scan 2 > Epson Scan 2.
• Mac: Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and select Epson Scan 2.
182
You see an Epson Scan 2 window like this:
183
Note: Select your product from the list, if necessary.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Related tasks
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program
You can start Epson Scan 2 from a TWAIN-compliant scanning program to select scan settings, scan,
and open the scanned image in the program.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
1. Open your scanning program and select its scanning option. (See your scanning program help for
instructions.)
2. Select your product.
Note: In certain programs, you may need to select your product as the "source" first. If you see a
Select Source option, choose it and select your product. With Windows, do not select a WIA option
for your product; not all scan functions will be available.
184
You see an Epson Scan 2 window like this:
185
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Related tasks
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet
You can use the Epson Smart Panel app to scan from a network scanner to an iOS or Android device
over a direct Wi-Fi connection.
1. Download the Epson Smart Panel app from your device's app store or from Epson's website. See
the link below.
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
3. Open the Epson Smart Panel app and select a scan menu on the home screen.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to scan and save your original.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Follow the instructions in these sections to scan using Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document
Capture (Mac).
Note: The Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) software must be installed on
your computer.
Setting the Operation Mode on the Product Control Panel
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows
Scanning with Document Capture - Mac
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture - Mac
Parent topic: Scanning
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
186
Setting the Operation Mode on the Product Control Panel
Before scanning to Document Capture Pro, set the operation mode on the control panel.
1. Make sure you installed the product software and connected the product to your computer or
network.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Settings.
4. Select General Settings > Scan Settings > Document Capture Pro.
5. Choose from the following Operation Mode options:
• Select Client Mode if Document Capture Pro is installed on a Windows or Mac computer.
• Select Server Mode if Document Capture Pro is installed on a Windows Server computer. Enter
the server address.
6. Click OK.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
You can use the Simple Scan option in Document Capture Pro to quickly scan an original.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in
Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Load your original in the product.
187
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
Note: Add and select your product in the Epson Scan 2 Scanner Settings list, if necessary. Open
Epson Scan 2, then select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
3. Select the Simple Scan tab.
You see a window like this:
4. Select the size of your original from the Document Size menu.
5. If you want to change specific settings for the scan, click the Scan Settings button. Change any of
the settings as necessary and click OK. For additional settings, click the Detailed Settings button
on the Scan Settings screen.
188
6. Do one of the following:
• To scan both sides of an original, select SCAN double-sided.
• To scan the front side of an original, select SCAN single-sided.
Your product scans the original and the image appears in the Edit Scanned Results window.
7. Review and edit the scanned image as necessary and click Next when you are finished.
8. Select a destination for the scanned image, change any settings as necessary, and click Complete.
Note: If you are sending the scanned image to a server or cloud destination, you need to enter your
login information.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
You can create scan jobs in Document Capture Pro and use them to quickly scan originals and save
them to various destinations.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in
Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Load your original in the product.
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
Note: Add and select your product in the Epson Scan 2 Scanner Settings list, if necessary. Open
Epson Scan 2, then select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
3. Select the Job Scan tab.
189
You see a window like this:
4. Select one of the scan jobs (or click Job Settings to create a new scan job).
The product scans the loaded original and saves it according to the job settings.
5. Depending on the settings for the scan job you selected, you may be able to view and edit the pages
before saving them. If so, click Complete when finished.
The scanned image is saved according to the job settings.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows
You can add scan jobs that contain specific scan settings and use the jobs when you scan from your
product control panel or the Job Scan option in Document Capture Pro. You can save up to 30 scan
jobs.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in
Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
190
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
Note: Add and select your product in the Epson Scan 2 Scanner Settings list, if necessary. Open
Epson Scan 2, then select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
2. Select the Job Scan tab.
You see a screen like this:
3. Click the Job Settings button.
191
You see a screen like this:
4. To add a scan job, click the New Job icon.
5. Enter a name for the new job, and select any settings as necessary from the following options:
• Scan: select the size, color, or resolution
• Save: select the file name, file type, or destination folder
• Index: enable the index setting and choose output options for an index file
• Send: select the destination for the scanned file, or choose to email or print the file
• Confirm/Test: select the job button icon and color, choose display settings, and run a test scan if
necessary
6. Click Save when you are finished.
The new job appears in the Job Scan window.
Note: Click OK, if necessary.
7. To assign a scan job to the product control panel, click the Button Assignment icon.
192
You see a screen like this:
8. Select the jobs that you want to assign to the product control panel using any of the pull-down
menus.
Note: The number of pull-down menus available may vary, depending on your product and any
connected options.
9. Click OK, then click Back.
You can now use the added scan jobs when you scan from the product control panel.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning with Document Capture - Mac
When you scan with Document Capture, the program automatically saves your scanned file on your
computer in the folder you specify. You can select settings, preview, and change the scanned file
settings as necessary. Document Capture also allows you to send the scanned file directly to an email
address or printer, or upload it to a server or cloud destination.
193
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. See the Help menu in
Document Capture at any time for more information.
1. Load your original in the product.
2. Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and select Document Capture.
You see a window like this:
Note: You may need to select your product from the drop-down list.
3. Click the scan icon.
194
You see a window like this:
Note: If you want to use a scan job that you created instead, select it from the Job list in the
Document Capture window, click the Start Job button, and skip the rest of these steps.
4. Select any displayed scan settings you want to use.
Note: See the Help information in Document Capture for details.
5. If you want to select detailed scan settings, close the Scan Settings window, open the Scan menu at
the top of the Mac desktop, and select Displays the EPSON Scan Setup Screen.
6. Click the Scan icon and select any detailed scan settings you want to use from the Epson Scan 2
window.
7. Click Scan.
195
You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture window.
Note: You may have to close the Epson Scan 2 window to view your scan in the Document Capture
window.
8. If you would like to scan additional originals and add them to the current captured images, click the +
icon, select Acquire from Scanner, and repeat the previous steps.
9. Check the scanned images and edit them as necessary.
10. Click one of the destination icons to choose where to send your scanned files. (If you cannot see all
of the icons, click the arrow next to the icons.) Change any settings as necessary.
Note: If you are sending the scanned image to a server or cloud destination, you need to enter your
login information. If you want to use Evernote as the destination, download the Evernote application
from the Evernote Corporation website and install it before scanning.
11. Depending on the destination you chose, click OK, Print, or Send to complete the operation.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture - Mac
You can add scan jobs that contain specific scan settings and use the jobs when you scan from your
product control panel or Document Capture. You can save up to 30 scan jobs.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. See the Help menu in
Document Capture at any time for more information.
1. Start Document Capture on a computer connected to the product.
2. Click the Manage Job icon from the toolbar at the top of the window.
You see a window showing the current scan job list.
3. To add a scan job, click the + icon, enter a name for the new job, select settings as necessary, and
click OK.
196
You can now use the new scan job when you scan with Document Capture.
4. To assign a scan job to the product control panel, click the or settings icon at the
bottom of the window and click Event Settings.
5. Select the jobs that you want to assign to the product control panel using any of the pull-down
menus.
Note: The number of pull-down menus available may vary, depending on your product and any
connected options.
6. Click OK, then click OK again.
You can now use the added scan jobs when you scan from the product control panel.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Epson Scan 2 gives you access to basic and advanced scanning features. You can scan your document
and save the scanned image in various file formats in your operating system's Documents or My
Documents folder, or open it in your scanning program. You can preview the scanned image and select
or change settings as necessary.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
1. Start Epson Scan 2.
197
You see this window:
198
Note: Select your product from the list, if necessary.
2. Select the Document Source setting that matches where you placed your original, or select Auto
Detect to have Epson Scan 2 automatically detect the source.
3. Select the Scanning Side setting if you are scanning from the ADF.
4. Select the Document Size setting that matches the size of your original, or select Auto Detect to
have Epson Scan 2 automatically detect the size. You can select Customize to enter a custom size,
if necessary.
5. Select the image type of your original and how you want it scanned as the Image Type setting.
6. Select the Resolution setting you want to use for your scan.
7. Select the Rotate setting to rotate the scanned image.
8. Select the Correct Document Skew setting to correct skewed originals, image contents, or both.
9. Click the Preview button.
Epson Scan 2 previews your original and displays the results in the Epson Scan 2 window.
10. Reinsert your original into the ADF, if necessary.
11. Select any of the additional settings that you want to use on the Main Settings tab.
199
12. Click the Advanced Settings tab and select any settings that you want to use.
13. Select the format in which you want to save your scanned file as the Image Format setting. If
necessary, select Options and select any desired format options.
14. Enter the file name for your scanned file in the File Name field. If necessary, select Settings to
modify the file name settings.
15. Select the location in which you want to save your scanned file as the Folder setting. If necessary,
select Select to create a new folder.
16. Click Scan.
The product scans your original and saves the scanned file in the location you specified.
Available Document Source Settings
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2
Image Format Options
Scan Resolution Guidelines
Parent topic: Scanning
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Available Document Source Settings
You can select these Document Source options in Epson Scan 2:
Auto Detect
Automatically detects where the originals are placed on your product for scanning.
ADF
Selects the Automatic Document Feeder as the location where the originals are placed on your
product for scanning.
Scanner Glass
Selects the scanner glass as the location where the originals are placed on your product for scanning.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab
You can select these additional scanning settings on the Epson Scan 2 Main Settings tab. Not all
adjustment settings may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
200
Stitch Images
When scanning double-sided originals, lets you lay out images from both sides of the original onto
one scanned page.
Rotate
Rotates the original image clockwise to the desired angle before scanning it. Select Auto to allow
your product to automatically rotate the image based on the orientation of the text (may take longer to
scan).
Correct Document Skew
Corrects skewed originals, image contents, or both.
Add or edit pages after scanning
Lets you add, remove, or edit the pages in a scan, including rotating pages and changing the page
order.
Note: To save multiple pages in a single file, you must select a file format that supports multiple
pages such as PDF or Multi-TIFF. If you select another file format, each scanned image or page is
saved as a separate file.
Skip Blank Pages
If the scanner detects marks from the other side of a blank page and adds the marks to the scanned
image, adjust this setting to prevent this.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
You can select these additional scanning settings on the Epson Scan 2 Advanced Settings tab. Not all
adjustment settings may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Remove Background
Removes the background of the originals.
Text Enhancement
Sharpens the appearance of letters in text documents.
Auto Area Segmentation
Makes black and white images clearer and text recognition more accurate by separating the text from
the graphics.
Threshold
Adjusts the level at which black areas in text and line art are delineated, improving text recognition in
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) programs.
201
Color Enhance
Enhances the shades of the color you select in the scanned image. This setting is available only if you
select Grayscale or Black & White as the Image Type setting.
Brightness
Adjusts the overall lightness and darkness of the scanned image.
Contrast
Adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas of the overall scanned image.
Gamma
Adjusts the midtone density of the scanned image.
Sharpness
Makes the edges of certain image areas clearer. Turn off this option to leave softer edges.
Descreening
Removes the ripple pattern that might appear in subtly shaded image areas, such as skin tones. This
option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers. (The results of descreening do not
appear in the preview image, only in your scanned image.)
Edge Fill
Corrects shadowing around the edges of the image by filling the shadows with black or white.
Dual Image Output
Scans the original image twice using different output settings (Windows only).
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2
You can scan a document and save the text in a searchable PDF. In a searchable PDF, text is
recognized using Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and then embedded in the scanned original.
Note: The required Epson Scan 2 OCR Component is installed automatically when you install your
product software. If you install your product software programs individually, be sure to also install this
component if you want to perform OCR.
1. Load your original in the product for scanning.
2. Start Epson Scan 2.
3. Select your scan settings.
4. Click Preview and adjust the area you want to scan, if necessary.
5. If you are using the ADF, reload the ejected original.
202
6. Select Searchable PDF as the Image Format setting.
7. Select Options from the Image Format list.
You see this window:
8. Select any of the options on the General tab.
9. Select the Text tab.
10. Make sure the language used in the document text is selected as the Text Language setting.
11. Click OK.
12. Confirm the File Name setting and select a Folder setting for your document.
13. Click Scan.
The scanned image is saved as a searchable PDF.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
203
Image Format Options
You can select different image formats and related options. For details on available options, click the ?
icon on the Epson Scan 2 Image Format Options window. Not all image formats have options.
BITMAP (*.bmp)
A standard image file format for most Windows programs.
JPEG (*.jpg)
An image format that lets you highly compress image data. However, the higher the compression, the
lower the image quality. (The TIFF format is recommended when you need to modify or retouch your
scanned image.)
PNG (*.png)
An image format that does not lose quality during editing.
TIFF (*.tif)
A file format created for exchanging data between many programs, such as graphic and DTP
software.
Multi-TIFF (*.tif)
A TIFF file format when multiple pages are saved to the same file, allowing you to edit the images
using a compatible program.
PDF (*.pdf)
A document format that is readable by Windows and Mac systems using Adobe Reader, Acrobat, or
other programs. You can save multi-page documents in one PDF file.
Searchable PDF (*.pdf)
A document format that is readable by Windows and Mac systems using Adobe Reader, Acrobat, or
other programs. You can save multi-page documents in one PDF file. Recognized text in the scanned
document can be searched.
In order to use the OCR option to create searchable PDFs, you must install the OCR license key.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Scan Resolution Guidelines
The Resolution setting, measured in dpi (dots per inch), controls the amount of detail captured in your
scans. Increasing the resolution raises the amount of detail captured but comes with the following
disadvantages:
• Larger file sizes
• It takes longer to scan your originals, send/receive your scans by email or fax, and to print your scans
• The image may become too large to fit on your display or print on paper
204
If you plan to enlarge a scanned image so you can print it at a larger size, you may need to increase the
resolution from the default resolution set by Epson Scan 2. Follow these guidelines to determine the
resolution setting you need:
• You will scan the image at its original size but enlarge it later in an image-editing program.
Increase the Epson Scan 2 Resolution setting in your scan. Increase the resolution by the same
amount you will increase the image size to retain a high image quality. For example, if the resolution is
300 dpi (dots per inch) and you will double the image size later, change the Resolution setting to 600
dpi.
• You will scan the image at 100% or a smaller size.
Select the Epson Scan 2 Resolution setting based on how you will use the scanned image:
• Email/view on a computer screen/post on the web: 96 to 200 dpi
• Print/fax/convert to editable text (OCR)/create searchable PDF: 200 to 300 dpi
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Scanning Special Projects
Your product's scanning software offers various options to help you quickly complete special scan
projects.
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service - Windows
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service - Mac
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows
Parent topic: Scanning
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service - Windows
You can use Document Capture Pro (Windows) to upload scanned images to a SharePoint server or a
cloud service.
Note: The settings may vary, depending on the software version you are using. See the help information
in Document Capture Pro for details.
1. Load your original in the product.
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
205
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
Note: Add and select your product in the Epson Scan 2 Scanner Settings list, if necessary. Open
Epson Scan 2, then select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
3. Select the Simple Scan tab.
You see a window like this:
4. If you want to select specific scan settings for the scan, click the Scan Settings button, select any
displayed settings you want to use, and click OK.
Note: See the help information in Document Capture Pro for details.
5. Do one of the following:
• To scan both sides of an original, select SCAN double-sided.
206
• To scan the front side of an original, select SCAN single-sided.
Your product starts scanning and you see the Edit Scanned Results window.
6. View and edit the scanned pages as necessary and click Next when you are finished.
Note: See the help information in Document Capture Pro for details.
7. Click one of the cloud server or service destination icons. You see the settings window.
8. Enter any required information to set up the destination. You may need to log in to your cloud service
to authenticate the connection and allow Document Capture Pro to access the cloud service.
9. Adjust any settings and click Complete.
Note: See the help information in Document Capture Pro for details.
Your originals are uploaded to the indicated server or cloud service.
Parent topic: Scanning Special Projects
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service - Mac
You can use Document Capture to upload scanned images to a SharePoint server or a cloud service.
Note: The screen shown may vary, depending on your OS version.
1. Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and select Document Capture.
207
You see a window like this:
Note: You may need to select your product from the drop-down list.
2. Click the scan icon.
3. Select any displayed scan settings you want to use.
Note: See the Help information in Document Capture for details.
4. Click Scan.
You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture window.
5. Click one of the cloud service Destination icons to choose where to save your scanned file. (If you
cannot see all of the icons, the service software may not be installed, the service may not be
available on your platform, or you need to click the arrow next to the icons.)
You see the Transfer Settings window.
6. Enter any required information to set up the destination. You may need to log in to your cloud service
to authenticate the connection and allow Document Capture to access the cloud service. If you have
previously created a saved setting for the destination, select it from the drop-down list.
7. Adjust any save settings, then click OK or Send, depending on the destination.
208
Your originals are scanned and uploaded to the indicated server or cloud service.
Parent topic: Scanning Special Projects
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows
You can use Document Capture Pro to scan multi-page originals as separate scanned files. You can
indicate how the separate files are created by defining a maximum page count per file or by inserting
blank pages, barcodes, or characters that can be detected by the software as separation markers.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in
Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Load your multi-page original in the product.
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
Note: Add and select your product in the Epson Scan 2 Scanner Settings list, if necessary. Open
Epson Scan 2, then select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
3. Select the Job Scan tab.
209
You see a window like this:
4. Click the Job Settings button.
You see a window like this:
210
5. Select New Job and select the scan settings. Click Next when finished.
You see a window like this:
6. Select the Apply job separation checkbox.
7. Select the method you want to use to separate the originals as the Separator setting. Click
Separation Settings to specify the settings for the selected option.
8. Finish creating the new scan job and click Save.
9. Click Back on the Job Settings screen.
Your originals are saved into separate files and folders as specified when the job is run.
Parent topic: Scanning Special Projects
211
Faxing
See these sections to fax using your product.
Note: This product allows you to store names, telephone numbers, and fax data in its memory even
when the power is turned off. Make sure you restore all of the default settings if you give away or dispose
of the product. This will erase all of your network settings and fax data.
Note: When using the PCL or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product, you can fax using the
printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software. To download the
standard Epson printer software,visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Sending Faxes
Receiving Faxes
Checking Fax Status
Printing Fax Reports
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
You must connect your product to a telephone wall jack to send or receive faxes. If you want to use the
same telephone line to receive calls, you can connect a telephone or answering machine to your product
using an additional phone cable.
Note: In areas where lightning strikes occur frequently, we recommend that you use a surge protector.
Note: If you do not connect a telephone to your product, make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto.
Otherwise, you cannot receive faxes.
212
1. Connect a phone cable to your telephone wall jack and to the LINE port on your product.
Note: If you have a DSL or ISDN connection, you must connect the appropriate DSL filter, or ISDN
terminal adapter or router to the wall jack to be able to use the line for faxing or voice calls using your
product. Contact your DSL or ISDN provider for the necessary equipment.
213
214
2. If you are connecting a telephone or answering machine to your product using a second phone
cable, remove the cap from the EXT port on your product.
215
3. Connect a second phone cable to your telephone or answering machine and to the EXT port on your
product.
Note: If you connect an answering machine and Receive Mode is set to Auto, set the number of
rings before your product answers a call to a number that is higher than your answering machine's
setting for the number of rings.
Parent topic: Faxing
Related references
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product
Related tasks
Using the Fax Setting Wizard
Receiving Faxes Automatically
216
Setting Up Fax Features
Before faxing with your product, set up your fax header and select the fax features you want to use.
Note: If you leave your product unplugged for a long period of time, you may need to reset the date and
time settings for faxes.
Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Mac
Parent topic: Faxing
Setting Up Basic Fax Features
See these sections to select the basic settings you need to use the product's fax features.
Using the Fax Setting Wizard
Selecting the Line Type
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Using the Fax Setting Wizard
You can setup the product's basic fax settings using the Fax Setting Wizard. This wizard is automatically
displayed when the product is turned on for the first time. You can also change these settings individually
from the Fax Settings menu.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Setting Wizard.
3. Connect your phone line and select Proceed.
4. On the next screen, use the displayed keypad to enter the sender name for your fax source, such as
your name or a business name. You can enter up to 40 characters. Select OK when complete.
5. On the next screen, use the displayed keypad to enter your fax number, up to 20 characters. Select
OK when complete.
Note: The name and phone number in the fax header identifies the source of the faxes you send.
217
6. On the Distinctive Ring Setting screen, do one of the following:
• If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company, select Proceed.
Select the ring pattern to be used for incoming faxes. If you select All, skip to step 7. Otherwise,
skip to step 9.
• If you do not have a distinctive ring service, select Skip and skip to step 9.
Note: Distinctive ring services allows you to have several phone numbers on one phone line. Each
number is assigned a different ring pattern. You can use one number for voice calls and another for
fax calls. Select the ring pattern assigned to fax calls in the Distinctive Ring Setting. If you select a
ring pattern other than All, Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto.
7. On the Receive Mode Setting screen, do one of the following:
• If you have connected an external telephone or answering machine to the product, select Yes.
• If you did not connect an external telephone or answering machine, select No and skip to step 9.
(Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto; otherwise you cannot receive faxes.)
8. On the next Receive Mode Setting screen, select Yes to receive faxes automatically or select No to
receive faxes manually.
Note: If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make
sure the Rings to Answer setting is correct. If you select to receive faxes manually, you need to
answer every call and operate the product’s control panel or your phone to receive faxes.
9. On the Proceed screen, confirm the displayed settings and select Proceed, or press the back arrow
to change the settings.
10. On the Run Check Fax Connection screen, select Start Checking and follow the on-screen
instructions to check the fax connection and print a report of the check result. If there are any errors
reported, try the solutions on the report and run the check again.
If the Select Line Type screen appears, select the correct line type.
If the Select Dial Tone Detection screen appears, select Disable. However, disabling the dial tone
detection function may drop the first digit of a fax number and send the fax to the wrong number.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Related tasks
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
218
Selecting the Line Type
If you connect the product to a PBX phone system or terminal adapter, you must change the product's
line type. PBX (Private Branch Exchange) is used in office environments where an external access code
such as “9” must be dialed to call an outside line. The default Line Type setting is PSTN (Public Switched
Telephone Network), which is a standard home phone line.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Line Type > PBX.
3. Select Access Code and select Use.
4. Select the Access Code field and use the displayed keypad to enter the access code, such as 9.
Then select OK.
5. Select OK to exit.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer
If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make sure the
Rings to Answer setting is correct. The number of rings should be higher than the number of rings your
answering machine is set to for answering a call.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rings to Answer.
3. Select the number of rings and select OK. Make sure to select a number higher than the number of
rings your answering machine is set to for answering a call.
Note: An answering machine picks up every call faster than the product, but the product can detect fax
tones and start receiving faxes. If you answer the phone and hear a fax tone, check that the product has
started receiving the fax, then hang up the phone.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
You can select a variety of advanced fax settings.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings.
219
3. If you want to create shortcuts for up to three fax operations, select Quick Operation Button and
select a setting and a shortcut button.
Note: These shortcuts are displayed on the Fax Settings tab in the main Fax screen.
4. Select the group of settings you want to change.
Basic Settings - Fax
Send Settings - Fax
Receive Settings - Fax
Report Settings - Fax
Security Settings - Fax
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Basic Settings - Fax
Select the basic options you want to use for incoming and outgoing faxes.
Setting Options Description
Fax Speed Fast(33,600bps) Sets the speed at which you send and receive faxes
Medium(14,400bps)
Slow(9,600bps)
ECM On Turns on Error Correction Mode (ECM) to
automatically correct errors in sent or received fax
data
Off Turns off Error Correction Mode (ECM); color faxes
cannot be sent or received
Dial Tone Detection On Automatically dials the number you enter for faxing
when the product detects a dial tone
Off Turns off automatic dial tone detection, which may
be necessary if the product is connected to a PBX
(Private Branch Exchange) or a TA (Terminal
Adapter). However, turning this setting off may cause
the product to drop the first digit of a fax number.
Dial Mode Various types of
phone systems
Selects the type of phone system you have
connected to the printer.
220
Setting Options Description
Line Type PSTN Selects a standard phone line (Public Switched
Telephone Network)
PBX Selects Private Branch Exchange, the type of phone
line used in office environments where an access
code such as 9 must be used to call an outside line
Header Your Phone
Number
Select to enter the header information and your
phone number for inclusion on outgoing faxes
Fax Header
Receive Mode Manual Lets you confirm whether an incoming fax should be
printed; a telephone must be connected to the
product
Auto Automatically receives and prints faxes
Distinctive Ring All If you are using a Distinctive Ring Service on your
phone line, your telephone company can assign two
or more phone numbers to the same line and assign
different ring patterns to each. If you use this service,
select the number of rings for your fax number so
your product can receive faxes on the correct
number of rings. Select All for phones lines that do
not use this service.
Single
Double
Triple
Double&Triple
Rings to Answer 1 to 9 Sets the number of rings before your product
receives a fax. If Receive Mode is set to Auto and an
answering machine is connected to the product,
make sure this setting is set higher than the number
of rings your answering machine is set to answer a
call.
Remote Receive Off Lets you start receiving faxes using your phone
instead of operating the product (if the Receive Mode
is set to Auto). When you select On, you must also
set a Start Code. If you are using a cordless handset
with its base connected to the product, you can start
receiving the fax by entering the code using the
handset.
On
Start Code
221
Setting Options Description
Rejection Fax Various Lets you automatically reject faxes from blocked
numbers, with blank headers, or from unrecognized
contacts
Receiving Paper Size A4/Letter Select the maximum paper size for faxes that the
product can receive.
B4
A3/11x17
Auto
Save/Forward File
Format
PDF Saves or forwards a fax as a PDF file. You can also
set a password for opening the PDF or allowing
printing and editing permissions.
TIFF Saves or forwards a fax as a TIFF file.
Cloud Destination List Various Allows user to register up to five addresses at a
cloud service recognized by Epson Connect.
Received faxes may be forwarded to the selected
cloud service. To use this feature, the printer must be
registered with Epson Connect.
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Send Settings - Fax
Select the send options you want to use for outgoing faxes.
Setting Options Description
Auto Rotation Off Sends an A4 or letter-size document that is placed
long edge first into the ADF as an A3-size fax
On
Quick Memory Send Off Sends the first page of a multi-page document as
soon as it finishes scanning. Select this option to
decrease the amount of time it takes to fax a
document.
On
Batch Send Off Sorts outgoing faxes by recipient in the product's
memory, and then sends them as a batch
On
222
Setting Options Description
Save Failure Data Off Saves faxes that failed to be sent in the product’s
memory. You can resend the faxes from the product's
Status Menu.
On
Wait Time for Next
Original
Off Sets a time in between sending the next fax
On
Fax Preview Display
Time
Off Sets a time for previewing the scanned document on
the LCD screen before it is sent
On
Allow Backup Allowed Allows you to back up sent faxes. Select Fax > Fax
Settings > Backup to view backed up faxes.
Not Allowed
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Receive Settings - Fax
Set the save/forward or print options you want to use for incoming faxes.
Save/Forward Settings
Setting Options Description
Unconditional
Save/Forward
Save to Inbox Saves received faxes in printer's inbox
Save to Computer Converts received faxes to PDFs and saves them on
a computer connected to the printer
Save to Memory
Device
Converts received faxes to PDFs and saves them on
an external memory device connected to the printer
Forward Forwards received faxes to another fax machine, or
converts them to PDFs or TIFFs and forwards them to
a shared folder on a network, or an email address.
You can also forward them to a cloud destination in
either PDF or JPEG format. Forwarded faxes are
deleted from the printer.
Email Notifications Sends an email notification after a fax is received,
printed, saved, or forwarded
223
Setting Options Description
Conditional
Save/Forward
— Sets up conditions to save, forward, or print received
faxes. Select Unregistered to enter conditions and
other settings.
Common Settings Inbox Settings Sets up what happens when the fax memory is full, or
sets up a password for the inbox.
Email Subject to
Forward
Specifies a subject when forwarding a fax to an email
address.
Box Document
Delete Settings
Select On to automatically delete received faxes after
a set period of time.
Print Settings
Setting Options Description
Auto Reduction On Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit
on the paper size in the selected paper source.
Off Select to print large incoming faxes at their original
size on multiple sheets, if necessary.
Split Page Settings Delete Print Data
After Split
Select how to split large incoming faxes across
multiple sheets when using the Auto Reduction
option.
Overlap When
Split
Acting Print On(Split to Pages) Select to split large incoming faxes across multiple
sheets.
On (Reduce to Fit) Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit
on the paper size in the selected paper source.
Off Select to print large incoming faxes at their original
size on multiple sheets, if necessary.
Auto Rotation On If you have loaded A5-size paper, select On to rotate
landscape-oriented incoming faxes so that they print
correctly on the paper.
Off
Add Reception
Information
On Select On to include the date, time, the sender's
information, and a page number in the header of your
incoming faxes.
Off
224
Setting Options Description
2-Sided On Select On to print incoming faxes double sided. You
can also select the Binding Margin.
Off
Print Start Timing All Pages
Received
Select to print incoming faxes after the product
receives all of the pages of the document.
First Page
Received
Select to print incoming faxes as soon as the product
receives the first page of the document.
Collation Stack On Select On to print incoming faxes so that the pages
are stacked in the correct page order. (When the
product is low on memory, this option may not be
available.)
Off
Print Suspend Time Off Select On to set a time period to stop automatic
printing of faxes or reports and save received faxes in
the product’s memory. (Make sure there is enough
free memory before using this function.)
On
Time to Stop
Time to Restart
Quiet Mode On Select On to reduce noise during printing (printing
speed may be reduced).
Off
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Report Settings - Fax
Select the options you want to use for fax reports.
Setting Options Description
Forwarding Report Print on Error Prints a report after forwarding a received document
only if an error occurs
Print Prints a report after forwarding a received document
Do Not Print Does not print a report after forwarding a received
document
Backup Error Report On Select On to print a report when a backup error for
sending faxes occurs
Off
225
Setting Options Description
Fax Log Auto Print Off Does not print a fax log
On(Every 100) Prints a fax log after every 100 fax jobs are
completed
On(Time) Prints a fax log at a specified time. If the number of
completed fax jobs exceeds 30, the fax log prints
before the specified time.
Reception Report Print on Error Prints a report after receiving a fax only if an error
occurs
Print Prints a report after receiving a fax
Do Not Print Does not print a report after receiving a fax
Attach Fax image to
report
Off Does not include an image on the Transmission
Report
On(Large Image) Prints a Transmission Report that includes the upper
part of the first page of the sent document
On(Small Image) Prints a Transmission Report that includes a reduced
size of the entire first page of the sent document
Fax Log Layout Combine Send and
Receive
Prints a Transmission Report and a Reception
Report on the same sheet when you print a fax log
Separate Send and
Receive
Prints a Transmission Report and a Reception
Report on separate sheets when you print a fax log
Report Format Simple Prints a simple fax report
Detail Prints a fax report that includes error codes
Fax Log Output Method Print Prints fax reports
Save to Memory
Device
Saves fax reports to an inserted memory device.
Select Create a folder to save fax data to create a
folder on the inserted memory device.
Forward Forwards fax reports to a specified destination
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Security Settings - Fax
Select the security options you want to use for fax data.
226
Setting Options Description
Direct Dialing
Restrictions
Off Does not restrict dialed fax numbers.
On Allows faxing only to numbers stored in the contacts
list or history.
Enter Twice Requires you to enter fax numbers twice to prevent
errors.
Broadcasting
Restrictions
Off Select On to allow only one fax number to be entered
as the recipient
On
Confirm Address List Off Selects whether or not to display a recipient
confirmation screen before a fax is sent.
On
Backup Data Auto Clear Off Automatically erases sent or received fax data from
your product's memory.
On
Clear Backup Data — Deletes all sent or received fax data remaining in your
product's memory; run this function if you are giving
away or disposing of your product.
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows
You can set up the FAX Utility for Windows for use with your product.
Note: Before using the FAX Utility for Windows, make sure you have set up the fax features on your
product using the product control panel. Also first confirm that you can send and receive faxes using the
control panel.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for EPSON Software and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select EPSON Software.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start > Programs or All Programs > EPSON Software.
2. Select FAX Utility.
227
The first time you use the FAX Utility, you see this introduction window:
3. Read about the FAX Utility and click Return to the main window at the bottom of the window.
228
You see this window:
4. Click Select Printer and follow the on-screen instructions to transfer your product's fax settings to
the FAX Utility.
Note: For detailed information, click Help or Open Online Help.
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Fax Features Using the Fax Utility - Mac
You can set up your fax header and select your fax settings using the FAX Utility for Mac.
229
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select Print &
Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select the FAX option for your product, and select
Options & Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
2. Double-click FAX Utility, if necessary.
You see a window like this:
3. Select your FAX product in the Printer list.
4. Select Fax Settings.
5. Follow the prompts that appear on the screen to enter your fax header information and select your
fax settings.
Note: For detailed information, select the FAX Utility ? icon.
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
You can set up a list of contacts and their fax numbers so you can quickly select them for faxing. You
can also set up contact groups to send a fax message to multiple contacts.
Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Parent topic: Faxing
230
Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
You can set up your contacts and contact groups using the control panel on your product.
Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact
your administrator for assistance.
Creating a Contact
Editing or Deleting a Contact
Creating a Contact Group
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Creating a Contact
You can create a list of contacts to save frequently used fax numbers.
Note: You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax > Contacts.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select Add Contact.
5. Select the registry number you want to use for the contact you are adding.
6. Select the Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters),
and select OK.
7. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters), and select OK. (This field is optional.)
8. Select the Fax Number field, use the numeric keypad on the LCD screen or the buttons on the
product to enter the fax number, and select OK. You can enter up to 64 characters.
Note: If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax number.
If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign instead of the
code.
231
9. If you are sending a fax to a confidential box or relay box, enter a sub-address and password in the
Subaddress (SUB/SEP) and Password (SID/PWD) fields.
10. Select any additional settings as necessary.
11. Select OK to save the entry.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Editing or Deleting a Contact
You can edit or delete any of the contacts on your list.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax > Contacts.
3. Select the tab containing the first letter of the contact name, then select the > icon next to the contact
you want to edit or delete.
4. Do one of the following:
• To delete the contact, select Delete and select Yes on the confirmation screen.
• To edit the contact, select Edit, select the item you want to change, enter the correct information,
and select OK. When you are finished editing, select OK.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Creating a Contact Group
You can create a group of contacts so that you can easily send faxes to multiple recipients.
Note: You can create up to 200 contacts and contact groups combined. You must create a contact
before creating a contact group.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax > Contacts.
3. Select the Add Contact icon.
4. Select Add Group.
5. Select the registry number you want to use for the group you are adding.
6. Select the Group Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the group name (up to 30
characters), and select OK.
232
7. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for a
group (up to 30 characters), and select OK. (This field is optional.)
8. Select the Contact(s) Added to the Group field.
You see your contacts list.
9. Select each contact you want to include in your group.
A check mark appears next to each selected contact.
10. Select Close when complete.
11. Select Assign to Frequent Use to list the group on the Recipient tab.
12. Select OK to save the group.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group
You can edit an existing contact group to add or delete entries. You can also delete the entire contact
group.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax > Contacts.
3. Select the > icon next to the group you want to edit or delete.
4. Do one of the following:
• To delete the group, select Delete and select Yes on the confirmation screen.
• To edit the group, select Edit and change the group name or contacts included as necessary.
5. Select OK when complete.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts Using the Product Control Panel
Sending Faxes
See these sections to send faxes using your product.
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac
Parent topic: Faxing
233
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
See these sections to send faxes using the product's control panel.
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History
Fax Sending Options
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time
Receiving a Fax by Polling
Sending a Stored Fax
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History
You can send a fax from your product control panel by entering the fax number, or selecting the number
from either the contact list or fax history.
Note: You can send a black-and-white fax to up to 200 recipients at a time, or send a color fax to one
recipient at a time. If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in
black-and-white.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Fax.
4. Do one of the following to select fax recipients:
• Manually enter a fax number: Select Keypad, enter a fax number, and select OK. To add
another fax number, repeat the same steps. You can also use the numeric keypad on the control
panel to enter a fax number.
Note: If direct dialing has been restricted, you can only select the number from the contact list or
fax history. If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax
number. If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign
instead of the code. If your fax number requires a brief pause, select the - icon to insert a pause
symbol (–).
• Select from the contact list: Select Contacts to display the contact list. Select one or more
contacts (select the contacts again to deselect it). You can also select the Search for Contacts
field to search for recipients by name, index name, or entry number. Select Close when you are
finished.
234
• Select from the sent fax history: Select Recent to display the sent fax history. Select a recipient
from the list.
Note: To delete entered recipients, select the Select Recipient field, select the recipient you want to
delete, and select Remove.
5. If you need to change any fax settings, select Fax Settings and select your settings.
6. If you want to preview your fax in black-and-white on the LCD, press the icon. (If the preview
looks incorrect, select Retry, reposition the document or change the fax settings, and repeat this
step.) You cannot send the fax in color after previewing it.
Note: If you do not touch the preview screen for 20 seconds, your product sends the fax
automatically. You cannot preview images when the Direct Send setting is turned on.
7. If you want to save your fax settings for later use, select Presets and add a new entry.
8. Press the Send icon.
Note: To cancel faxing, select Cancel.
Your product scans your original and prompts you to place additional pages, if necessary.
After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax.
Note: Your product does not save sent color faxes to its memory. If the Settings > General Settings >
Fax Settings > Send Settings > Save Failure Data setting is enabled, faxes that failed to send are
stored to the product's memory and you can resend them from Job in the Job/Status screen.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
Using Presets
Selecting the Line Type
Related topics
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Placing Originals on the Product
235
Fax Sending Options
While sending a fax, you can select Fax Settings and select these options.
Setting Options Description
Original Size (Glass) Various sizes Sets the size for a document placed on the scanner
glass
Original Type Text Specifies the document type of your originals and
adjusts the quality of your copies
Text & Image
Photo
Color Mode B&W Select whether to scan images in black and white or
color
Color
Resolution Standard Adjusts the scan resolution and print quality of
outgoing faxes
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Density Varying levels Lets you select from various density levels
Remove Background Auto Automatically removes any background color on
scanned images
Varying levels
available
Lets you select from various levels of background
color adjustment
Sharpness Varying levels
available
Lets you adjust the sharpness level of outgoing faxes
ADF 2-Sided Off Select On to enable 2-sided faxing from the ADF. The
Direct Send option and color faxing are disabled when
you turn on this setting.
On
236
Setting Options Description
Continuous Scan (ADF) Off Select On to have the product to prompt if you want to
scan another page after a document in the ADF has
finished scanning.
If you leave the product with the prompt displayed for
20 seconds, the product starts sending the document.
If you load multiple sizes of documents in a single
batch, they are sent at the size of the largest
document. To send them at their original size, do not
mix sizes in the ADF.
On
Direct Send Off Select On to send black-and-white faxes to a single
recipient as soon as the connection is made, without
saving the scanned image to memory. You cannot
use this setting when sending a color fax or sending a
fax to multiple recipients.
On
Priority Send Off Select On to send the current fax before other faxes
waiting to be sent
On
Send Fax Later Off Select On to send the current fax at a selected time
On
Add Sender Information Off Lets you include a header, your phone number, or a
destination list in the selected location on your
outgoing faxes
Outside of Image
Inside of Image
Notify Send Result Off Sends a notification to the selected email address
when an outgoing fax is sent
On
Transmission Report Print on Error Lets you select when to print transmission reports
Print
Do Not Print
Backup Off Saves a copy of the scanned fax to the selected email
address or network folder/FTP location
On
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
237
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time
You can send a fax at a time of your choice.
Note: Make sure the product's date and time settings are correct. You can only send faxes in black-and-
white when you use this option.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Fax.
4. Enter a fax number or select a number from the Contacts or Recent lists.
5. Select Fax Settings.
6. Select Send Fax Later.
7. Select On.
8. Select Time, use the displayed keypad on the LCD screen to enter your desired time, and select
OK.
9. Select Send.
Note: To cancel faxing, select Cancel.
After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax at the specified time.
Note: If the product is turned off at the specified time, the fax is sent when it is powered on.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
Selecting the Date and Time
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
238
Receiving a Fax by Polling
You can use polling to receive a fax from another fax machine (such as a fax information service).
Note: You cannot use polling to receive a fax from a fax information service that uses audio guidance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select Extended Fax.
5. Select Polling Receive to turn on the setting and select Close.
6. Select Close.
7. Enter the fax number you expect to receive the fax from.
8. Select Polling to start receiving the fax.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Receiving Faxes
Sending a Stored Fax
You can store up to 10 scanned documents (up to 100 black-and-white pages) and send them whenever
necessary.
Note: If you try to store more than 10 jobs or 100 pages, they overwrite previously stored documents. Be
sure to check how many fax jobs are stored before storing additional jobs by running a Fax Report.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Fax.
4. Select the icon.
5. Select Extended Fax.
6. Select Store Fax Data to turn on the setting and select Close.
7. Select any other fax settings as necessary and select Close.
8. Select Store.
239
9. When you are ready to send the document, press the home button if necessary and select Fax
Box.
10. Select Stored Documents.
11. Select the stored fax job you want to send.
12. Select Start Sending.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone
If you connected a telephone to the EXT port on your product, you can send a fax by dialing the fax
number from the connected telephone. If the recipient's phone number and fax number are the same,
you can speak to the recipient before sending the fax.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Dial the fax number from the connected telephone. Speak to the recipient if necessary.
Note: If you are using a pre-paid calling card, enter the number and password required to use the
card before entering the destination fax number.
4. Select Fax on the LCD screen.
5. Select Fax Settings and select settings as necessary.
Note: Your product now communicates with the recipient's fax machine. Do not hang up the
telephone.
6. When you hear a fax tone, select Send to start sending the fax.
Note: If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in black-
and-white.
7. Hang up the telephone.
240
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows
You can send a fax from a printing program in Windows. You can fax up to 100 pages at a time,
including a cover sheet.
1. Open the file you want to fax and select the print command.
You see a window like this:
2. Select your product with the FAX option as the printer.
241
3. To change the Paper Size, Orientation, Color, Image Quality, or Character Density settings, click the
Preferences or Properties button, change the necessary settings, and click OK.
Note: If you see a Setup, Printer, or Options button, click it. Then click Preferences or Properties
on the next screen. For more information about selecting fax print settings, click Help.
4. Select the Page Range as necessary. (Leave the Number of copies set to 1.)
5. Click Print or OK.
If you’re faxing for the first time, you see a window like this one:
6. Enter your sender information so that recipients can identify the origin of the fax. Then click OK to
save the sender information.
242
You see a window like this:
7. Enter the recipient's name and fax number or select a recipient from the phone book, then click
Next.
Note: For detailed instructions on using the Epson FAX Utility, click Help.
8. Select a cover sheet and enter a subject and message, then click Next.
9. Click Send to transmit your fax.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac
You can send a fax from a Mac printing program using the FAX Utility. You can fax up to 100 pages at a
time, including a cover sheet.
243
1. Open the file you want to fax.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and the application
you are using.
3. Select your product FAX option as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
5. Select the number of pages you are faxing as the Pages setting.
Note: Leave the Copies setting set to 1.
6. Select Recipient Settings from the pop-up menu.
244
You see this window:
7. Do one of the following to choose your recipient:
• Select a name or group from the Recipient List.
• Enter a name, company, and fax number and click the + button.
• Click the icon and select a recipient from your address book.
8. Select Fax Settings from the pop-up menu.
245
You see this window:
9. Select the Color and Image Quality settings you want to use for your fax.
10. Click Fax.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Receiving Faxes
See these sections to receive faxes with your product.
Fax Reception
Receiving Faxes Automatically
Receiving Faxes Manually
Forwarding Received Faxes
Receiving a Fax by Polling
Saving Faxes to an External USB Device
Saving and Viewing Received Faxes
Parent topic: Faxing
Fax Reception
Your product will automatically receive and print faxes when you set the Receive Mode to Auto.
246
If you connected a telephone to your product so you can use the same phone line for faxes and voice
calls, you can also set your product to receive faxes manually. This allows you to check for a fax tone
using the telephone and press a button on your product to receive the fax.
Make sure to load paper in your product and select your fax settings before receiving a fax.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Receiving Faxes Automatically
To receive faxes automatically, make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto (the default setting for the
product).
To change the Receive Mode if necessary, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic
Settings > Receive Mode.
If an answering machine is connected, make sure the product's Rings to Answer setting is set higher
than the number of rings your answering machine is set to answer a call. For example, if the answering
machine is set to pick up on the fourth ring, set the product to pick up on the fifth ring or later.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Related references
Basic Settings - Fax
Related tasks
Receiving Faxes Manually
Receiving Faxes Manually
You can set up your product to receive faxes manually by setting the Receive Mode to Manual. This lets
you check for a fax tone on the connected telephone before receiving a fax.
1. To change the Receive Mode, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic
Settings > Receive Mode and select Manual.
2. When the connected telephone rings, answer the call.
3. If you hear a fax tone, select Fax on the LCD screen.
4. Select Send/Receive.
5. Select Receive.
6. Select Receive again to start receiving the fax.
7. Hang up the telephone.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
247
Related references
Basic Settings - Fax
Basic Settings - Fax
Forwarding Received Faxes
You can forward received faxes to another fax machine, or convert the faxes into PDF documents and
forward them to a shared folder on the network or to an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted
from the product's memory.
Before using this feature, make sure the date and time are set correctly, the forwarding destination is set
up in the contact list, and the email server settings are configured.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
> Unconditional Save/Forward > Forward.
3. Select Yes.
Note: If you want to print the fax automatically before forwarding it, select Yes and Print.
4. Select Add Entry, select the forwarding destination from the contacts list, and select Close.
5. Confirm the displayed forwarding destinations and select Close.
6. Under Options When Forwarding Failed, select whether you want to print the faxes or save them in
the printer's inbox if forwarding the received fax fails.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Receiving a Fax by Polling
You can use polling to receive a fax from another fax machine (such as a fax information service).
Note: You cannot use polling to receive a fax from a fax information service that uses audio guidance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select Extended Fax.
5. Select Polling Receive to turn on the setting and select Close.
248
6. Select Close.
7. Enter the fax number you expect to receive the fax from.
8. Select Polling to start receiving the fax.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Receiving Faxes
Saving Faxes to an External USB Device
You can save incoming faxes to an external USB device connected to your product.
1. Insert an external USB device into the product's USB port.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
> Unconditional Save/Forward.
4. Select Save to Memory Device
5. Select Yes to save the fax or Yes and Print to save and print the fax.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Saving and Viewing Received Faxes
You can save received faxes in your product's memory and view them on the LCD screen. The inbox
and confidential boxes can hold a maximum of 200 faxes in total.
Note: The inbox can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access the inbox, contact your
administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings.
3. To save received faxes, select Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional
Save/Forward.
4. Select Save to Inbox to turn on the setting.
5. Press the home button again.
6. Select Fax Box.
249
7. Do one of the following to view stored faxes:
• Select Inbox/Confidential to view received faxes.
• Select Stored Documents to view saved faxes that have not been sent (available only when
Store Fax Data is turned on).
• Select Polling Send/Board to view faxes that are stored for fax polling or stored in a bulletin
board.
8. Select the fax you want to view.
The LCD screen displays the fax contents.
9. If you want to print or forward a stored fax, select the icon.
10. Select one of the printing or forwarding options, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note: Delete faxes after you print or view them to free up the product's memory. When the memory is
full, you can only forward or print incoming faxes.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Checking Fax Status
You can check the status of fax jobs on the product control panel.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Select the icon.
4. To check the history of faxes that have been sent or received, select Transmission Log and select
the job you want to check.
Note: If you see a numbered icon above the icon on your product's LCD screen or the
received fax light is flashing, received faxes have been temporarily saved to the product's
memory.
5. To check the status of a fax in progress, press the Job/Status button.
Parent topic: Faxing
250
Printing Fax Reports
You can print several types of fax reports whenever necessary. You can also print the fax log
automatically by turning on Fax Log Auto Print.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Press the icon.
4. Select Fax Report.
5. Select the fax report you want to print.
Fax Report Options
Parent topic: Faxing
Fax Report Options
Select the fax report or list you want to print.
Last Transmission
Print a report on the fax that was previously sent or received through polling.
Fax Log
Print a report on recent fax transmissions.
Stored Fax Documents
Print a list of the fax jobs currently stored in the product's memory.
Fax Settings List
Print a list of the current fax communication settings.
Conditional Save/Forward List
Print a list of the current conditional save/forward settings.
Protocol Trace
Print a detailed report for the previously sent or received fax.
Parent topic: Printing Fax Reports
251
Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Follow the instructions here to work with an external USB device connected to your product.
Connecting a USB Device
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Transferring Files on a USB Device
Connecting a USB Device
Connect a USB device or its USB cable to the USB port on the front of the product.
To view instructions on connecting a USB device or cable, select , then select How To > USB
memory connection.
Perform the steps in reverse order to remove the external USB device.
Caution: If you remove the external USB device while operating the product, the data on the external
USB device may be lost.
Note: Epson cannot guarantee the compatibility of your device. Make sure the files on the device are
compatible with the product.
Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product
252
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
See these sections to view and print photos or other files displayed on your product's LCD screen.
Printing JPEG Photos
Printing TIFF and PDF Files
Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Printing JPEG Photos
You can select JPEG photos for printing as you view them on the LCD screen.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Memory Device > JPEG.
Note: If you have more than 999 JPEG images on your device, the images are divided into groups,
and you must first select the group you want to display.
3. Do one of the following to select your photos:
• In Tile View, select the thumbnail images of the photos you want to print.
• In Single View, select the image of the photo you want to print, then select the left or right arrow
buttons to scroll through and select additional photos, or select Tile View to return to the
thumbnail image view and select additional photos.
• To select all photos, select the menu icon and select Select All Images.
4. Select Proceed to Print.
5. To change the print settings, select Basic Settings and select the necessary settings.
6. To adjust the photos (adjustments modify only your printed copies, not the original files), select
Advanced and make the necessary adjustments.
7. Use the numeric keypad on the control panel or select Copies on the LCD screen and use the
numeric keypad on the screen to select the number of copies (up to 99).
8. When you are ready to print, select the Print icon.
Note: To cancel printing, press the stop button or select Cancel on the LCD screen, then select
Cancel again to confirm.
253
Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode
Parent topic: Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing from a USB device.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.
Basic Settings
Print settings Available options Description
Paper Setting Various paper size
and type settings
Indicates the source that contains the paper size and type
you want to print on
Color Mode B&W Prints the photo in black and white
Color Prints the photo in color
Advanced settings
Print settings Available options Description
Layout 1-up Print one photo per page
20-up Print 20 photos per page
Index Print numbered photo thumbnails with date information
Fit Frame On Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo
layout
Off Turns off automatic cropping
Quality Standard Provides good quality for most prints
Best Provides the highest quality for special prints
Date Various date formats Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the
format you select
254
Print settings Available options Description
Fix Photo Auto Optimizes the Fix Photo adjustments for specific types of
photos; select the option that best matches your photo
content
People
Landscape
Night Scene
Enhance Off
Fix Red-Eye On Automatically fixes the red-eye effect in photos
Off
Parent topic: Printing JPEG Photos
Printing TIFF and PDF Files
You can select and print TIFF or PDF files from a USB flash drive.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Memory Device.
3. Select TIFF or PDF.
You see a list of the available files.
4. Select the file you want to print.
You see information about the file.
5. Do the following as necessary:
• To print more than one copy, use the numeric keypad on the control panel or select Copies on the
LCD screen and use the numeric keypad on the screen to select the number of copies (up to 99).
• To change the print settings, select Basic Settings or Advanced and select the necessary
settings.
6. When you are ready to print, select the Print icon.
Note: To cancel printing, press the stop button or select Cancel on the LCD screen, then select
Cancel again to confirm.
Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode
255
Print Setting Options - PDF Mode
Parent topic: Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing a TIFF from a USB device.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.
Basic Settings
Print settings Available options Description
Paper Setting Various paper size
and type settings
Select the paper source that you want to use.
Color Mode B&W Prints the photo in black and white
Color
Advanced settings
Print settings Available options Description
Layout 1-up Print one photo per page
20-up Print 20 photos per page
Index Print numbered photo thumbnails with date information
Fit Frame On Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo
layout
Off Turns off automatic cropping
Quality Standard Provides good quality for most prints
Best Provides the highest quality for special prints
Print Order — Select the printing order for multi-page documents
Date Various date formats Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the
format you select
Parent topic: Printing TIFF and PDF Files
256
Print Setting Options - PDF Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing a PDF from a USB device.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.
Basic Settings
Print settings Available options Description
Paper Setting Various paper size
and type settings
Indicates the source that contains the paper size and type
you want to print on
Color Mode B&W Prints the photo in black and white
Color Prints the photo in color
Advanced settings
Print settings Available options Description
2-Sided Off Two-sided printing is off.
On Two-sided printing is on.
Binding Position Select the binding position for the document.
Print Order — Select the printing order for multi-page documents.
Parent topic: Printing TIFF and PDF Files
Transferring Files on a USB Device
You can transfer files to and from a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your product.
Setting Up USB Device Access
Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Setting Up USB Device Access
Before you can access a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your product, you may
need to enable the access setting.
Caution: Remove the USB device before you change this setting or you may lose data from the device.
257
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Memory Device Interface.
3. Make sure Memory Device is set to Enable.
4. Select File Sharing.
5. Select the way your computer is connected to the product: either USB or Network.
Parent topic: Transferring Files on a USB Device
258
Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette
Rollers
When ink is expended, or the maintenance box and cassette rollers are at the end of their service life,
you need to replace them. The maintenance box stores ink that gets flushed from the system during print
head cleaning.
Note: Please dispose of your used Epson branded ink cartridges and maintenance boxes responsibly
and in accordance with local requirements. If you would like to return your used ink cartridges and
maintenance boxes to Epson for proper disposal, please go to epson.com/recycle for more information.
Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Maintenance Box Replacement
Replacing the Rollers for Paper Cassette 1
Replacing the Rollers for Paper Cassettes 2 to 4
Resetting the Roller Counter on the LCD Screen
Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges
Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows
Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Your product and its software will let you know when an ink cartridge is low or expended, or when the
maintenance box needs to be replaced.
Note: When using the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product,
you can check ink cartridge and maintenance box status by using the printer buttons or the utilities
included with the standard Epson printer software. To download the standard Epson printer software,
visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)
and select your product.
Ink Safety Precautions
Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status with Windows
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status - Mac
259
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Ink Safety Precautions
• Keep ink cartridges and maintenance box out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.
• Keep the ink cartridges and maintenance box out of direct sunlight.
• Store ink cartridges in a cool, dark place; do not store the ink cartridges or maintenance box in high or
freezing temperatures.
• Be careful when you handle used ink cartridges; there may be ink remaining around the ink supply
port. If ink gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and water. If it gets in your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If you experience discomfort or vision problems after flushing your eyes, see a
doctor immediately. If ink gets in your mouth, see a doctor immediately.
• Do not dismantle an ink cartridge. This could damage the print head.
• Do not disassemble or modify the ink cartridge or maintenance box; otherwise ink may get into your
eyes or on your skin or you may not be able to print normally.
• Do not shake cartridges too vigorously; this can cause them to leak.
• Do not drop or knock ink cartridges or the maintenance box against hard objects; this can cause
leakage.
• Do not remove or tear the label on the cartridge; this can cause leakage.
• Use an ink cartridge before the date printed on its package or within six months of opening the
package, whichever is earlier.
• After bringing an ink cartridge inside from a cold storage site, allow it to warm up at room temperature
for at least three hours before using it.
• Do not open the ink cartridge package until you are ready to install it in the printer. The cartridge is
vacuum packed to maintain its reliability. Leaving a cartridge unpacked for a long time before using it
may prevent normal operation.
• Do not break the hooks on the side of the cartridge when removing it from the packaging.
• Do not shake cartridges after opening their packages; this can cause them to leak.
• Do not remove the transparent seal from the bottom of the cartridge. This may cause the cartridge to
become unusable.
• Do not touch the green IC chip on the side of the cartridge. This may prevent normal operation.
• Make sure to install all ink cartridges. The printer only works when all ink cartridges are properly
installed.
260
• Do not turn off the product during ink charging. If ink charging is incomplete, you may not be able to
print.
• If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and store it in
the same environment as the product. Note that there is a valve in the ink supply port, making covers
or plugs unnecessary, but care is needed to prevent the ink from staining items that the cartridge
touches. Do not touch the ink cartridge ink supply port or surrounding area.
• Install a new ink cartridge immediately after removing an expended one. Leaving cartridges
uninstalled can dry out the print head and may prevent the product from printing.
• Do not turn off the printer during cartridge replacement. Otherwise, ink remaining in the print head
nozzles will dry out and you may not be able to print.
• Do not put your hands inside the product or touch any cartridges during printing.
• Removed ink cartridges may have ink around the ink supply port, so be careful not to get any ink on
the surrounding area when removing the cartridges.
• Do not remove and reinstall an ink cartridge except when necessary. Ink may get on the surrounding
area if a cartridge is repeatedly removed and reinstalled.
• Even if some ink cartridges are dented due to the vacuum packing process, the quality and quantity of
ink are guaranteed, and they can be used safely. Do not open the ink cartridge package until you are
ready to replace an old cartridge.
• The specifications and appearance of the ink cartridge may be modified for improvement without prior
notice.
Ink Consumption
• This printer uses ink cartridges equipped with a green chip that monitors information such as the
amount of remaining ink for each cartridge. This means that even if the cartridge is removed from the
printer before it is expended, you can still use the cartridge after reinserting it back into the printer.
However, when reinserting a cartridge, some ink may be consumed to guarantee printer performance.
• To ensure you receive premium print quality and to help protect your print head, a variable ink safety
reserve remains in the cartridge when your printer indicates that it is time to replace the cartridge.
Quoted ink yields do not include this reserve.
• Quoted yields may vary depending on the images that you are printing, the paper type that you are
using, the frequency of your prints and environmental conditions such as temperature.
• Do not use the cartridges that came with the printer for the replacement. The ink in the ink cartridges
supplied with your printer is partly used during initial setup. In order to produce high quality printouts,
the print head in your printer needs to be fully charged with ink. This process consumes a quantity of
ink and, therefore, these cartridges may print fewer pages compared to subsequent ink cartridges.
261
• To maintain optimum print head performance, some ink is consumed from all ink cartridges during
maintenance operations. Ink may also be consumed when you replace an ink cartridge or turn the
printer on.
• When printing in monochrome or grayscale, color inks may be used instead of black ink depending on
the paper type or print quality settings you are using. This is because a mixture of color inks is used to
create black.
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen
When one of your ink cartridges is low or expended, you see a message on the LCD screen. Tap How
To and follow the steps on the LCD screen to replace the ink cartridge.
You can also check the status of the ink cartridges and maintenance box from the product control panel.
Note: You can still print when you see the low ink warning message. Replace the ink cartridges when
required.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select the icon.
Note: The displayed ink and maintenance box levels are approximate.
You see a screen like this:
The ink and maintenance box levels are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
3. For more information, select the ink images at the bottom of the screen.
262
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Related concepts
Maintenance Box Replacement
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status with Windows
You can check your ink cartridge or maintenance box status at any time using a utility on your Windows
computer.
Note: You can continue printing while the low ink message is displayed. Replace the ink when required.
1. To check your status, do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name and select Printer preferences.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printer preferences.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select Printer preferences.
2. Select the Maintenance tab and select EPSON Status Monitor 3.
3. Replace or reinstall the ink cartridge or maintenance box as indicated on the screen. Select Details
if necessary.
Note: If any ink cartridge installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model, or
improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate ink status.
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status - Mac
You can check your ink cartridge or maintenance box status at any time using a utility on your Mac.
Note: You can continue printing while the low ink message is displayed. Replace the ink when required.
263
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select Print &
Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies.
Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
2. Select EPSON Status Monitor.
3. Do the following as necessary:
• You can update the ink cartridge and maintenance box status by clicking Update.
• Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or any ink cartridge as indicated on the screen.
Note: If any ink cartridge installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model, or
improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate cartridge status.
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales),
epson.ca (Canadian sales), or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies
from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the
U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Note: Your printer is designed to work only with genuine Epson-brand ink cartridges. Other brands of ink
cartridges and ink supplies are not compatible and, even if described as compatible, may not function
properly or at all. Epson periodically provides firmware updates to address issues of security,
performance, minor bug fixes and ensure the printer functions as designed. These updates may affect
the functionality of third-party ink. Non-Epson branded or altered Epson cartridges that functioned prior
to a firmware update may not continue to function.
The included initial cartridges are designed for reliable printer setup and cannot be used as replacement
cartridges or resold. After setup, the remaining ink is available for printing. Yields are based on ISO
24711 in default mode, printing continuously. Yields vary due to print images, settings, and
temperatures. Printing infrequently or primarily with one color reduces yields. All cartridges must be
installed with ink for printing and printer maintenance. For print quality, some ink remains in replaced
cartridges.
Ink Cartridge Part Numbers
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
264
Ink Cartridge Part Numbers
Use these part numbers when you order or purchase new ink cartridges.
Maintenance box part number: T6714
Ink color Part number
Standard-capacity High-capacity Extra High-capacity
Black T13S1 T13U1 T13V1
Cyan T13S2 T13U2 T13V2
Magenta T13S3 T13U3 T13V3
Yellow T13S4 T13U4 T13V4
Parent topic: Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Make sure you have your replacement cartridges handy before you begin. You must install new
cartridges immediately after removing the old ones.
Caution: Leave your old cartridges in the printer until you are ready to replace them to prevent the print
head nozzles from drying out. Do not open ink cartridge packages until you are ready to install the ink.
Cartridges are vacuum packed to maintain reliability.
1. Turn on your product.
2. If an ink cartridge is low or expended, a message appears on your product and on your computer
screen. Note which cartridges need to be replaced.
265
3. Open the front cover.
4. Push the ink cartridge in, then pull it out of the slot.
Note: Dispose of used cartridges carefully. Do not take the used cartridge apart or try to refill it.
Warning: If ink gets on your skin, wash it thoroughly with soap and water. If ink gets into your eyes,
flush them immediately with water. If ink gets into your mouth, spit it out and see a doctor right away.
Keep ink cartridges out of the reach of children.
266
5. Remove the new cartridge from the package.
Caution: Do not touch the green chip on the cartridge. Install the new cartridge immediately after
removing the old one; if you do not, the print head may dry out and be unable to print.
6. Gently shake the ink cartridge horizontally about fifteen times.
Caution: Do not remove any labels or seals, or ink will leak.
267
7. Insert the new cartridge into the holder and push it in until it clicks into place.
8. When you are finished, close the front cover.
The product starts charging the ink and returns to its previous state when finished.
Note: Do not turn off the printer during ink replacement.
Caution: If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and
store it in the same environment as the printer. The valve in the ink supply port is designed to contain
any excess ink, but do not touch the ink supply port or surrounding area. Always store ink cartridges with
the label facing up; do not store cartridges upside-down.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Related concepts
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
Maintenance Box Replacement
The maintenance box stores surplus ink that gets collected during printing or print head cleaning. When
you see a message on the LCD screen, follow the on-screen instructions to replace the maintenance
box.
Note the following precautions when replacing the maintenance box:
• Do not touch the green chip on the side of the maintenance box.
• Do not remove the film on the top of the box or ink may leak.
• Do not tilt the maintenance box after removing it or ink may leak.
268
• Keep the maintenance box out of direct sunlight.
• Do not remove the maintenance box during printing or ink may leak.
Caution: Do not reuse a maintenance box that has been removed and left uninstalled for a long period.
Keep the maintenance box away from direct sunlight.
Note: The maintenance box is a user-replaceable part and is not covered by the product warranty.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Replacing the Rollers for Paper Cassette 1
When the rollers in paper cassette 1 need to be replaced, you see a message on the LCD screen. There
are three rollers for paper cassette 1: two on the back of the product and one on the cassette.
Note: Check that the arrows on the rollers point clockwise before installing them in paper cassette 1.
There are different rollers for paper cassette 1 and the other paper cassettes.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Wait for the power light to turn off, then unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the replacement rollers from their package.
Caution: If there is any dirt or dust on the rollers, clean them with a soft, moist cloth. Using a dry
cloth can damage the surface of the roller.
269
4. Pull out paper cassette 1.
5. Open rear cover 1 (D1).
270
6. Pull out rear cover 2 (D2).
7. Remove the roller cover inside the product.
271
8. Pull up the roller tabs and slide the rollers to the left to remove them.
9. Insert the replacement rollers and slide them to the right until they click into place.
10. Replace the roller cover as shown and press it down until it clicks into place.
11. Insert rear cover 2 (D2).
272
12. Close the rear cover 1 (D1).
13. On paper cassette 1, pull up on the lever as shown to release the roller.
14. Slide the roller towards the lever and lift it out of the cassette.
273
15. Insert the pointed end of the replacement roller's shaft into the hole in the cassette and gently slide
the roller into the slot with the flat side of the shaft facing toward the front of the cassette.
16. Press down on the lever as shown to lock the roller in place.
17. Insert the paper cassette all the way into the product.
Reset the maintenance roller counter for paper cassette 1 to keep track of roller usage.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Replacing the Rollers for Paper Cassettes 2 to 4
When the rollers in paper cassettes 2 to 4 need to be replaced, you see a message on the LCD screen.
There are three rollers for each paper cassette: two on the back of the product and one on the cassette.
274
Note: Check that the arrows on the rollers point counterclockwise before installing them in paper
cassettes 2 to 4. There are different rollers for paper cassette 1 and the other paper cassettes.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Wait for the power light to turn off, then unplug the power cord.
3. Remove the replacement rollers from their package.
Caution: If there is any dirt or dust on the rollers, clean them with a soft, moist cloth. Using a dry
cloth can damage the surface of the roller.
4. Pull out the paper cassette.
275
5. Open the rear cover (E) that matches with the paper cassette you removed.
276
6. Use a screwdriver to remove the three screws on the inner cover and remove the cover.
7. Pull down the roller tabs and slide the rollers to the right to remove them.
277
8. Insert the replacement rollers and slide them to the left until they click into place.
9. Use a screwdriver to secure the inner cover to the printer with the three screws you removed.
10. Close the rear cover (E).
11. On the paper cassette you removed, pull up on the lever as shown to release the roller.
12. Slide the roller towards the lever and lift it out of the cassette.
278
13. Insert the pointed end of the replacement roller's shaft into the hole in the cassette and gently slide
the roller into the slot with the flat side of the shaft facing toward the front of the cassette.
14. Press down on the lever as shown to lock the roller in place.
15. Insert the paper cassette all the way into the product.
Reset the maintenance roller counter for the paper cassette to keep track of roller usage.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Resetting the Roller Counter on the LCD Screen
You must reset the roller counter after replacing the cassette rollers to clear the roller replacement
message and to keep track of roller usage correctly.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > Maintenance > Pickup roller information > Reset Counter.
279
3. Select the paper cassette in which you replaced the rollers.
4. Select Yes.
5. Select Yes again to confirm the reset.
6. If you want to feed a sheet of paper to check the roller installation, select Yes. (Otherwise, select
No.)
7. Press the home button to exit.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges
When a color ink cartridge is expended, you can temporarily continue printing from your computer using
black ink. Replace the expended color cartridge as soon as possible for future printing.
Note: You cannot print with expended color ink cartridges using your product's control panel.
Printing with Expended Color Ink Cartridges - Control Panel
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - Windows
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - Mac
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Printing with Expended Color Ink Cartridges - Control Panel
If printing stops, you can cancel your print job and select settings to temporarily print with only black ink
on plain paper or on an envelope.
1. When a message is displayed prompting you to replace the ink supply units, press the Proceed
button.
2. If you see a message telling you that you can temporarily print with only black ink, click the Proceed
button.
3. If you want to print in monochrome, select No, remind me later. The ongoing job is canceled, and
you can print on plain paper with margins around the edges.
Parent topic: Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges
280
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - Windows
If you see a message during printing telling you that you can temporarily print in black ink with an
expended color cartridge, you can cancel your print job and select settings to print on plain paper or on
an envelope.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
Note: To use this feature, Epson Status Monitor must be enabled.
1. Click Cancel or Cancel Print to cancel your print job.
Note: If the message screen appears on another computer on a network, you may need to cancel
the print job using the product control panel.
2. Load plain paper or an envelope in your product.
3. Access the print settings in your print application.
4. Click the Main tab.
5. Select Plain Paper/Bright White Paper or Envelope as the paper type setting.
6. Select the Black/Grayscale checkbox.
7. Click OK.
8. Print your document.
Epson Status Monitor 3 displays a print message.
9. Click Print in Black to print your document.
Parent topic: Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges
Printing with Expended Color Cartridges - Mac
If printing stops, you can cancel your print job and select settings to temporarily print with only black ink
on plain paper or on an envelope.
The following paper types support printing with expended color cartridges:
• Plain paper
281
• Pre-printed paper
• Letterhead
• Color paper
• Recycled paper
• High-quality plain paper
• Thick paper
• Envelopes
1. Click the printer icon in the Dock.
2. If you see a message telling you that you can temporarily print with only black ink, click the Delete or
button to cancel your print job. If you see an error message, click OK.
Note: If the message screen appears on another computer on a network, you may need to cancel
the print job using the product control panel.
3. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings.
4. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
5. Select Driver or Options.
6. Select On as the Permit temporary black printing setting.
7. Click OK.
8. Close the utility window.
9. Load a paper type compatible with temporary black printing in your product.
10. Select Print Settings from the pop-up menu.
11. Select a non-borderless paper size as the Paper Size setting.
12. Select a paper type that supports Permit temporary black printing as the media type setting.
13. Select the Grayscale option as the color setting.
14. Click Print to print your document.
Parent topic: Printing with Black Ink and Expended Color Cartridges
282
Conserving Low Black Ink with Windows
The following window appears when black ink runs low and there is more color ink.
Note: The window appears only when you have selected Plain Paper/Bright White Paper as the paper
type setting, and depends on other selected print settings. To use this feature, Epson Status Monitor
must be enabled.
• Click Yes to use a mixture of color inks to create black, or No to continue using the remaining black ink
for the document you are printing.
• Click Disable this feature to continue using the remaining black ink.
Note: If you disable this feature, it remains disabled until you install a new black ink cartridge.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
283
Adjusting Print Quality
If your print quality declines, you may need to run a utility to clean or align the printhead.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
If running these utilities does not solve the problem, you may need to replace the ink cartridges.
Print Quality Adjustment
Printhead Maintenance
Print Head Alignment
Cleaning the Paper Guide
Print Quality Adjustment
If your printouts become grainy or blurry, you notice misalignment of vertical lines, or you see dark or
light horizontal bands, you may need to adjust the print quality.
Note: Banding may also occur if your print head nozzles need cleaning.
Adjusting the Print Quality Using the Product Control Panel
Adjusting the Quality for Each Paper Type
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Adjusting the Print Quality Using the Product Control Panel
You can adjust the print quality using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Quality Adjustment.
284
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to print an alignment sheet.
Note: Do not cancel printing while you are printing head alignment patterns.
6. Check the printed patterns on the alignment sheet and select the following on the LCD screen:
• For patterns 1 and 2, select the number representing the pattern with the least misaligned vertical
line.
• For patterns 3 and 4, select the number representing the pattern with the least amount of
separation or overlap.
7. Select Done.
Parent topic: Print Quality Adjustment
Related topics
Loading Paper
285
Adjusting the Quality for Each Paper Type
If you still notice dark or light bands in your printouts after adjusting the print quality, you can adjust the
quality for each paper type.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load the paper type you want to the adjust the quality for into the printer.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Quality Adjustment per Paper.
5. Select one of the following options:
• Print Pattern to adjust the paper type for your printer
• Enter Set Value to enter paper type alignment information for use on multiple printers of the same
model
6. Select the paper type you loaded into the printer.
7. If you printed a pattern, check the printed patterns on the alignment sheet and select the number
representing the pattern with the least amount of separation or overlap.
8. Select Done.
Parent topic: Print Quality Adjustment
Related topics
Loading Paper
286
Printhead Maintenance
If your printouts become too light, or you see dark or light bands across them, you may need to clean the
printhead nozzles. Cleaning uses ink, so clean the nozzles only if print quality declines.
You can check for clogged nozzles before you clean them so you don’t clean them unnecessarily.
Note: You cannot clean the print head if an ink cartridge is expended, and may not be able to clean it
when a cartridge is low. You must replace the cartridge first.
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Related topics
Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Print Head Nozzle Check
You can print a nozzle check pattern to check for clogged nozzles.
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
Parent topic: Printhead Maintenance
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
You can check the print head nozzles using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Head Nozzle Check > Start.
The nozzle pattern prints.
287
5. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
6. Do one of the following:
• If there are no gaps, select .
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select and continue.
7. Follow the instructions on the screen to clean the print head, check the nozzles, and repeat the
process as necessary.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times, turn the product off using
the power button and wait at least 6 hours. Then run a nozzle check and try cleaning the print head
again, if necessary. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson support.
Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check
288
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Related topics
Loading Paper
Checking the Nozzles Using a Computer Utility
You can check the print head nozzles using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer.
1. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
2. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right
side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
• Mac: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
3. Select Nozzle Check or Print Head Nozzle Check.
289
You see a window like this:
4. Click Print.
290
5. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
6. Do one of the following:
• If there are no gaps, click Finish.
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, clean the print head.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times, turn the product off using
the power button and wait at least 6 hours. Then run a nozzle check and try cleaning the print head
again, if necessary. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson support.
Parent topic: Print Head Nozzle Check
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Related topics
Loading Paper
291
Print Head Cleaning
If print quality has declined and the nozzle check pattern indicates clogged nozzles, you can clean the
print head.
Note: You cannot clean the print head if an ink cartridge is expended, and may not be able to clean it
when a cartridge is low. You must replace the cartridge first.
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
Parent topic: Printhead Maintenance
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
You can clean the print head using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Head Cleaning > Start to clean the print head.
When the cleaning cycle is finished, you see a message on the screen.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to load to print a nozzle check pattern and confirm that the print
head is clean.
292
6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times, turn the product off using
the power button and wait at least 6 hours. Then run a nozzle check and try cleaning the print head
again, if necessary. If quality still does not improve, contact Epson support.
Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Related topics
Loading Paper
Cleaning the Print Head Using a Computer Utility
You can clean the print head using a utility on your Windows or Mac computer.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
293
3. Do one of the following:
• Windows: Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right
side of the Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
• Mac: In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select
Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options &
Supplies. Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
4. Select Head Cleaning or Print Head Cleaning.
You see a window like this:
5. Click Start to begin the cleaning cycle.
The power light flashes throughout the cleaning cycle and stays on when the cleaning cycle is
finished.
294
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
6. When the cleaning cycle is finished, you can check to see if the nozzles are clean; click Print Nozzle
Check Pattern and click Print.
7. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
Print head needs cleaning
• If there are no gaps, click Finish.
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, click Clean to clean the print head again.
If you don’t see any improvement after cleaning the print head up to 4 times, turn off the product and wait
at least 6 hours. Then check the print head nozzles and try cleaning the print head again, if necessary. If
quality still does not improve, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Print Head Cleaning
Related topics
Loading Paper
Print Head Alignment
If your printouts become grainy or blurry or you notice misalignment of vertical lines, you may need to
align the print head.
Note: Banding may also occur if your print head nozzles need cleaning.
Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
295
Aligning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
You can align the print head using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Ruled Line Alignment.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions to print an alignment sheet.
Note: Do not cancel printing while you are printing head alignment patterns.
6. Check the printed patterns on the alignment sheet and select the number representing the pattern
with the least misaligned vertical line on the LCD screen:
7. Select Done.
Parent topic: Print Head Alignment
Related topics
Loading Paper
Cleaning the Paper Guide
If you see ink on the back of a printout, you can clean the paper guide roller to remove any excess ink. If
paper does not feed correctly from the rear paper feed slot, you can use a cleaning sheet to clean the
rollers.
1. If printouts are smeared or scuffed, load plain paper in the paper source that you want to clean in this
size: A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]).
296
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Settings > Maintenance > Paper Guide Cleaning.
4. Select the paper source you want to clean then select Start.
5. Repeat these steps as necessary until the paper comes out clean. If you are using a cleaning sheet,
repeat these steps up to 3 times.
Note: If the paper is not clean after cleaning several times, try cleaning the other paper sources.
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Related topics
Loading Paper
297
Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
See these sections if you need to clean or transport your product.
Cleaning Your Product
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
Transporting Your Product
Cleaning Your Product
To keep your product working at its best, you should clean it several times a year.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it.
Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Wait for the power light to turn off, then unplug the power cord.
3. Disconnect any connected cables.
4. Remove all the paper from the product.
5. Pull out the paper cassette.
298
6. Use a soft, moist cloth to clean the cassette roller.
Caution: Using a dry cloth can damage the surface of the roller.
7. Insert the paper cassette all the way into the printer.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for any additional paper cassettes.
9. Clean the outer case and control panel with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
You can clean the scanner glass if your copies or scanned images are smeared.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it.
Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
Warning: Do not trap your fingers when opening or closing the document cover or you may be injured.
1. Open the document cover.
2. Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to clean the surface of the scanner glass.
Note: If the glass is stained with grease or dirt, use a small amount of glass cleaner on a soft, dry
cloth to remove it. Wipe off all remaining liquid after removing the dirt.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surface with
any force. Be careful not to scratch or damage the glass; this can affect scan quality.
299
3. Close the document cover.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
You can clean the ADF if you see lines or streaks in your copies or scanned images.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it.
Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
1. Open the ADF cover.
300
2. Use a soft, lint-free cloth (microfiber is recommended) moistened with a little water to clean the
rollers and the interior of the ADF.
Caution: Do not use a dry cloth; you may damage the ADF rollers. Do not use the ADF until the
rollers have dried.
3. Close the ADF cover and open the document cover.
301
4. Clean the areas indicated in the image:
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surface with
any force. Be careful not to scratch or damage the glass; this can affect scan quality.
Note: If the glass is stained with grease or dirt, use a small amount of glass cleaner on a soft, dry
cloth to remove it. Wipe off all remaining liquid after removing the dirt.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Transporting Your Product
If you need to store your product or transport it a long distance, prepare it for transportation as described
here.
302
Caution: During transportation and storage, follow these guidelines:
• Because the product is heavy, two or more people should lift and carry it using the hand position
shown:
• Avoid tilting the product, positioning it vertically, or turning it upside down; otherwise ink may leak.
• Leave the ink cartridges installed. Removing the cartridges can dry out the print head and may prevent
the product from printing.
• Leave the maintenance box installed; otherwise ink may leak.
Note: Before storing your product for a long period, replace low, expended, or expired ink to help
prevent the print head from drying out. Store your product in a cool, dry place.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Wait for the power light to turn off, then unplug the power cord.
3. Remove all the paper from the product.
4. Disconnect any connected cables and external storage devices.
303
5. Close the rear paper support and remove the output tray.
Note: Do not place the output tray on top of the product. The output tray can fall while the product is
being moved and you can be injured.
6. Remove the optional cabinet and paper cassettes (if they are installed) before lifting the product.
Note: If the optional cabinet is installed, you can use the casters on the cabinet to roll the product
instead of lifting it. Remove the cabinet stands and unlock the casters before moving the product. Do
not roll the product over uneven or rough surfaces to avoid harsh impacts to the product.
7. Place the product in its original packing materials, if possible, or use equivalent materials with
cushioning around the product. Make sure the box adequately protects the product control panel.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Print Quality Adjustment
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
304
Administering Your Product
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure your product's administrator settings using the Web
Config software.
Note: Before you can configure system administration settings, you must connect the product to a
network.
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config
Configuring Product Settings
Configuring Security Settings
Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft)
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software
Accessing the Web Config Utility
You can select your product's network settings and confirm its operating status using a web browser.
You do this by accessing your product's built-in Web Config utility from a computer or other device that is
connected to the same network as your product.
Note: You can also access the Web Config utility from the product information area in the Epson Smart
Panel app.
1. Print a network status sheet.
2. Locate the IP address for your product that is listed on the network status sheet.
3. On a computer or other device connected to the same network as your product, open a web
browser.
4. Enter your product's IP address into the address bar.
Note: The printer uses a self-signed certificate when accessing HTTPS. This may cause a warning
message when you access Web Config. This does not indicate a problem and can be ignored.
5. Select Log In and enter the administrator password. The administrator password is required to
access the full capabilities of the Web Config utility.
305
You see the available Web Config utility options.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config
You can set an administrator password using your product's control panel, Web Config, or EpsonNet
Config.You can change the administrator password using your product's control panel, Web Config, or
Epson Device Admin. You use the same administrator password in all cases.
Note: If you forget your administrator password, contact Epson for support.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Product Security tab.
2. Select Change Administrator Password.
3. Enter a user name, if necessary.
4. Enter the current password, then enter and confirm the new password in the fields provided.
Note: The default password is the product's serial number. Check the label on the back of
the product to locate the serial number. The default user name is blank.
5. Click OK.
Note: To restore the administrator password to the default value, select Restore Default Settings on
the Change Administrator Password screen.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Configuring Product Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure your product's control panel settings using the Web
Config software.
Checking Status Information
Managing the Network Connection
Setting Control Panel Options
Sending Email Notifications
Adjusting Power Saving Settings
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
306
Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Updating Firmware Using Web Config
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server
Clearing the Internal Memory
Adjusting the Contact List View Options
Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely
Restoring Default Product Settings
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Checking Status Information
You can check information about the printer using the Web Config interface.
Note: Depending on the features of your product, not all of the options below may be available. Some
options are not available unless you are logged in to the Web Config interface.
1. Enter the IP address of the printer to access Web Config and log in as an administrator, if necessary.
2. Select the Status tab and choose one of the following options:
• Select Product Status to view information such as ink level and maintenance box status.
• Select Network Status to view network information such as the IP address and network
connection status.
• Select Usage Status to view information about the number of prints and historical information
about the product.
• Select Hardware Status to view information about the product functions.
• Select Job History to view information about the jobs completed on the product.
• Select Panel Snapshot to view a image of the current LCD screen.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Managing the Network Connection
You can check or update the network information for your product using the Web Config interface.
1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log in as an administrator.
2. Select the Network tab, then select Basic.
3. Check or update the settings as necessary.
307
4. Select Next to see a summary of the network settings.
5. Select OK to accept the changes.
Note: The network connection will be temporarily interrupted to enable the new settings.
6. Select the other network options as necessary:
• Wi-Fi: Displays the current wireless network connection information. Select Setup to run the
wireless setup again or Disable Wi-Fi to turn off Wi-Fi.
• Wired LAN: Displays the current settings for the wired connection. Change the settings as
necessary and then select Next to view the changes. Confirm the information and select OK to
apply the changes.
• Wi-Fi Direct: Displays the current settings for the Wi-Fi Direct network. Adjust the settings as
necessary and select Next to view the changes. Confirm the information and select OK to apply
the changes.
Network Settings
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Network Settings
The following network settings are available under the Network tab in the Web Config interface.
Basic
Setting Description
Device Name Displays the Device Name. You can enter a new name to
change the name of the device.
Location Displays a user-entered location for the printer
Obtain IP Address Sets the IP Address; if set to Manual, enter the information in
the appropriate fields
Set using BOOTP Enables IP addressing using BOOTP
Set using Automatic Private IP
Addressing (APIPA)
Enables IP addressing using APIPA
308
Setting Description
IP Address Displays the IP address. If you are manually entering the IP
address, enter it in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a
number between 0 and 255). Make sure the address is
unique and does not conflict with any other device on your
network.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask. If you are manually entering the
subnet mask, enter it in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where
xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
Default Gateway Displays the default gateway address. If you are manually
setting the default gateway, enter it in the format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
DNS Server Setting Selects the DNS server setting. If the Obtain IP Address
setting is set to Manual, this setting is also set to Manual.
Primary DNS Server Enter the address of the primary DNS server in the format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
Secondary DNS Server Enter the address of the secondary DNS server in the format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
DNS Host Name Setting Sets the DNS Host Name selection method.
DNS Host Name Displays the current DNS Host Name.
DNS Domain Name Setting Sets the DNS Domain Name selection method
DNS Domain Name Specifies the DNS domain name. The name must conform to
the following format:
• Enter between 2 and 249 characters using only the
characters "A-Z", "a-z", "0-9", hyphen "-", and a period "."
• The first character cannot be a "0-9", hyphen "-", or a
period "."
• The last character cannot be a hyphen "-" or a period "."
• Each label in the domain name must be between 1 and 63
characters and separated by a period.
• The total number of characters in the host and domain
name must not exceed 251.
309
Setting Description
Register the network interface
address to DNS
Allows you to register the host and domain names through a
DHCP server that supports Dynamic DNS
Proxy Server Setting Enables the use of a proxy server
Proxy Server Specifies the name of the proxy server in either IPv4 or
FQDN format
Proxy Server Port Number Specifies the port number for the proxy server (between 1
and 65535)
Proxy Server User Name Specifies the user name for the proxy server (0-255 ASCII
characters [0x20-0x7E])
Proxy Server Password Specifies the password for the proxy server (0-255 ASCII
characters [0x20-0x7E])
IPv6 Setting Enables the use of IPv6 addressing
IPv6 Privacy Extension Enables the use of private IPv6 addresses
IPv6 DHCP Server Setting Enables the use of a IPv6 DHCP server
IPv6 Address Specifies the IPv6 address. The address must conform to the
following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx / prefix
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits, and the
prefix is a decimal number from 1 to 128.
• If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted.)
IPv6 Address Default Gateway Specifies the IPv6 address of the default gateway. The
address must conform to the following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits
• If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted.)
IPv6 Link-Local Address Displays the valid IPv6 Link-Local Address
IPv6 Stateful Address Displays the valid IPv6 Stateful Address
IPv6 Stateless Address 1 Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 1
310
Setting Description
IPv6 Stateless Address 2 Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 2
IPv6 Stateless Address 3 Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 3
IPv6 Primary DNS Server Specifies the address for the IPv6 primary DNS server. The
address must conform to the following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits
• If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted)
IPv6 Secondary DNS Server Specifies the address for the IPv6 secondary DNS server.
The address must conform to the following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits
• If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted.)
IEEE802.11k/v Enables the use of IEEE802.11k/v network environments
IEEE802.11r Enables the use of IEEE802.11r network environments
Wired LAN
Setting Description
Link Speed and Duplex Selects the communication mode for the wired connection
IEEE 802.3az Enables the use of IEEE 802.3az network environments
Wi-Fi Direct
Setting Description
Wi-Fi Direct Enables the product's Wi-Fi Direct network
SSID You can change part of the SSID for the product.
311
Setting Description
Password Specifies the password for the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Note: Changing the password will disconnect any devices
currently connected to the network.
Frequency Range Selects the frequency range used by the Wi-Fi Direct
network.
IP Address Specifies the IP address for the Wi-Fi Direct network. If set to
Manual, enter the IP address in the provided fields.
Parent topic: Managing the Network Connection
Setting Control Panel Options
You can configure the behavior of the product control panel using the Web Config interface or the menus
on the control panel.
1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log into Web Config as an administrator.
2. Select Device Management > Control Panel and set the following items as necessary:
• Language: Sets the display language
• Panel Lock: Requires an administrator login to access some menu settings on the control panel.
The administrator password must be set to enable this feature.
• Operation Timeout: Cancels operations and automatically logs out users after a selected time
period. You can select a time period between 10 seconds and 240 minutes.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Sending Email Notifications
You can set up email notifications that will be sent when an event occurs on the product. You can
register up to five destinations.
Note: You must have configured a mail server before setting up notifications.
1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log into Web Config as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Email Notification.
312
3. Set the contents of the email subject line by selecting items from the drop-down menus.
Note: You cannot select the same item in both menus. If the Location setting is longer than 32 bytes,
it will be truncated in the Subject line.
4. Enter up to five email addresses to receive the notification emails, and select the language of the
notification email.
5. In the Notification Settings area, select one or more email addresses to receive a notification for
each event.
6. Click OK to apply the settings.
Note: To clear the email notification settings, select Restore Default Settings. This clears all email
notification settings, not just the changes made in the current session.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Adjusting Power Saving Settings
The product can automatically enter sleep mode or turn off after it has not been used for a while. You
can set the delay before the product enters sleep mode or turns off.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Power Saving setting.
3. Set Sleep Timer to the number of minutes before the product enters a low-power mode.
4. Select Power Off Timer to set the amount to time of inactivity before the product turns off.
Note: If you are using a printer with the fax feature enabled, select None.
5. Click OK.
Note: You can also configure the power saving settings using the control panel by selecting Settings >
General Settings > Basic Settings and selecting the feature you want to change.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
You can adjust the sound level heard when you press buttons on the control panel.
313
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Sound setting.
3. Select volume and sound settings as necessary for Normal Mode and Quiet Mode. You can also
create different sound settings for fax operations.
4. Click OK.
Note: You can also configure the sound settings using the control panel by selecting Settings >
General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to import and export your product's settings using the Web
Config software.
Exporting Settings Using Web Config
Importing Settings Using Web Config
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Exporting Settings Using Web Config
You can export your product's settings and optionally encrypt the settings file with a password.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Export under Export and Import Setting Value.
3. Select the settings you want to export.
Note: If you select a parent category, the child categories are also selected. By default, items that
are unique on the network, such as IP address, cannot be selected. If you want to export these
items, select Enable to select the individual settings of device. It is recommended that you
export only unique items when replacing a product on the network, otherwise you may encounter
conflicts on the network.
4. Enter an encryption password, if desired.
5. Click Export and save the file.
Parent topic: Importing and Exporting Product Settings
314
Importing Settings Using Web Config
You can import settings to your product that you have exported previously. If encryption was used when
the settings were exported, obtain the necessary password before you import.
Note: When importing values that include individual information such as a printer name or IP address,
make sure the same IP address does not already exist on the same network.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Import under Export and Import Setting Value.
3. Click Browse and select the exported settings file.
4. If necessary, enter the decryption password.
5. Click Next.
6. Select the settings to import and click Next.
7. Click OK.
The selected settings are imported to the product.
Parent topic: Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Updating Firmware Using Web Config
If your product is connected to the Internet, you can update the product firmware using Web Config.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select Device Management > Firmware Update.
3. Click Start to check for the latest firmware.
4. If there is a firmware update, click Start to begin the update.
Note: Make sure the product is not in use and clear any errors on the LCD screen before starting the
update. You can also schedule a firmware update by selecting Automatic Firmware Update from
the menu.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server
You can synchronize the product with an NTP time server to set the date and time on the product.
315
Note: If you are using a CA certificate or Kerberos authentication, it is recommended to use a time
server to set the date and time.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Date and Time > Time Server setting.
3. Set Use Time Server to Use.
4. Enter the time server address in Time Server Address. You can use the IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN
format for the address. You are limited to 252 characters.
Note: If you do not specify the address, leave it blank.
5. Enter an update interval (up to 10080 minutes) in Update Interval (min).
6. Click OK to update the settings.
Note: You can see the time server connection status next to Time Server Status.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Clearing the Internal Memory
You can delete the contents of the product's internal memory, such as password-protected print jobs and
downloaded PCL fonts and macros using the Web Config interface. You cannot select individual items to
delete.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Clear Internal Memory Data setting.
3. Select Delete and confirm your selection.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Adjusting the Contact List View Options
You can adjust the way contacts are listed on the product's LCD screen. You can also configure the way
searches are performed when searching the contact list.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Contacts Manager setting.
3. Select either Tile View or List View to control how the contacts are displayed on the product's LCD
screen.
316
4. Select a search option from the Search Options drop-down list.
5. Select OK to apply your changes.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely
You can power off or reboot the product using the Web Config interface.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Power setting.
3. Select a power option from the drop down menu and select Execute.
Note: After turning off the product, you cannot access Web Config until the product is turned on again.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Restoring Default Product Settings
You can reset the product to the default settings using the Web Config interface.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Restore Default Settings setting.
3. Select an option from the drop-down list. You can either restore network settings or all data and
settings.
4. Select Execute and confirm your selection to restore the product settings.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Configuring Security Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure internal security features for your product using the
Web Config software.
Connecting an Authentication Device
Restricting Features Available for Users
Disabling the External Interface
Setting Up Password Encryption
Working with Audit Logs
Restricting PDL File Operations
317
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up
Restricting Domain Access
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Connecting an Authentication Device
You can connect an authentication device such as an IC card reader using a USB cable, and check the
functionality of the reader using the Web Config interface.
1. Remove the sticker covering the service port on the rear of the product.
2. Connect the card reader’s USB cable to the service port on the product.
3. Access Web Config and log in using the administrator name and password.
Note: You can also check the card reader status on the product control panel by selecting Settings
> Authentication Device Status.
318
4. Select Device Management > Card Reader.
5. Set the card reader parameters as necessary.
6. Select Check to verify the connection status of the authentication device.
Note: To confirm that the authentication device can recognize an authentication card, hold the card
over the reader while you select Check.
7. Click Next.
8. Click OK to confirm the settings.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Restricting Features Available for Users
Follow the instructions in these sections to restrict users from using certain product features and create
an administrator password to lock the restrictions using the Web Config software.
User Feature Restriction
Configuring User Feature Restrictions
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
User Feature Restriction
You can restrict available product features for individual users, with different features available to each
user. This requires users to log into the product control panel with their user name and password before
they can use control panel features.
With Windows, you can also restrict printing and scanning from the product software. This requires users
to log into the printing or scanning software, and allows the software to authenticate the users before
printing or scanning proceeds. For instructions on setting up software restrictions, see the help utility in
the printing or scanning software.
Parent topic: Restricting Features Available for Users
Configuring User Feature Restrictions
You can create up to 10 user accounts and restrict access to control panel features separately for each
one.
Note: If you are using an authentication system, it uses the number one user account. If you create other
user accounts, use the number two to number 10 user accounts.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Product Security tab.
319
2. Select the Enables Access Control checkbox.
3. If you have configured the product for an LDAP server, you can deselect the Allows printing and
scanning without authentication information from a computer checkbox to prevent the product
from receiving jobs sent from these sources:
• The default operating system driver
• A PCL or PostScript printer driver
• Web services such as Epson Connect
• Smartphones and other mobile devices
4. Click OK.
5. Select User Settings.
6. Click Add.
7. Enter a name for a user in the User Name field following the guidelines on the screen. Use ASCII
(0x20-0x7E) characters.
8. Enter a password for the user in the Password field following the guidelines on the screen.
Note: If you need to reset a password, leave the password field blank.
9. Select the checkbox for each function you want the user to be able to perform, and deselect the
checkbox for each function you want to restrict access to.
10. Click Apply.
Note: When you edit a completed user account, you see a Delete option. Click it to delete a user, if
necessary.
Note: You can import and export a list of user features using EpsonNet Config. See the help utility in the
software for instructions.
Parent topic: Restricting Features Available for Users
Disabling the External Interface
You can restrict the ability to connect from a computer using a USB connection or accessing a
connected USB device or memory card.
Note: Depending on your product features, not all of the options listed below may be available.
320
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Product Security > External Interface.
2. Select Memory Device and do one of the following:
• Select Disable to prevent access to a USB device or memory card.
• Select Enable to allow access to a USB device or memory card.
3. Select PC Connection via USB and do one of the following:
• Select Disable to prevent a computer from connecting to the product over a USB connection.
• Select Enable to allow a computer to connect to the product over a USB connection.
4. Click OK to save your setting.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Setting Up Password Encryption
You can set up password encryption to protect confidential information stored in the product.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab and select Password Encryption.
3. Select On and select OK.
A message appears about restarting the product. Select OK.
4. Turn the product off and then on again to apply the password encryption setting.
Note: The product may take longer than usual to turn on. This is normal.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Working with Audit Logs
You can enable the Audit Log feature or export audit log data using the Web Config interface. Audit logs
can be used to track security issues or identify improper usage.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Audit Log setting.
3. Select ON and then click OK to enable the audit log feature.
4. Select Export to export the audit log data to a CSV file, or select Delete to delete all audit logs.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
321
Restricting PDL File Operations
You can protect files from unauthorized PDL operations using the Web Config interface.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the File Operations from PDL setting.
3. Select Allowed or Not Allowed to enable or disable PDL file operations and select OK to apply your
setting.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up
Your product automatically checks whether unauthorized third parties have tampered with the program
when the product starts up. If it detects that the product has been rewritten with invalid firmware, it will
stop and update the firmware.
If you enable Do not start if tampering is detected, the printer will display an error and stop booting. It
is not recommended to enable the Do not start if tampering is detected setting as the default setting.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select Program Verification on Start Up.
3. Enable the Do not start if tampering is detected setting.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Restricting Domain Access
You can set up restrictions on the email domains that can be used for email notifications using the Web
Config interface.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Domain Restrictions setting.
3. Select a restriction method for the Restriction Rule setting. Select Allow Sending to limit sending
emails to the listed domains or select Deny Sending to prevent emails from being sent to the listed
domains.
4. Add the necessary domains to the list by entering them in the Domain Name field and selecting
Add.
The domain is added to the list. To delete a domain, select the checkbox next to the domain name
and select Delete.
5. Select OK to apply your changes.
322
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure security features for your product on the network
using the Web Config software.
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Using a Digital Certificate
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config
You can enable or disable protocols using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator, select Network Security, and select Protocol.
2. Select or deselect the checkbox next to the service name to enable or disable a protocol.
3. Configure any other available protocol settings.
4. Click Next.
5. Click OK.
6. Select and configure services and protocol settings as necessary.
After the protocols restart, the changes are applied.
Protocol Settings
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Protocol Settings
Protocols
Name Description
Bonjour Bonjour is used to search for devices and AirPrint
SLP SLP is used for push-scanning and network searching in
EpsonNet Config
323
Name Description
WSD Add WSD devices, or print and scan from the WSD port
LLTD Displays the product on the Windows network map
LLMNR Use name resolution without NetBIOS even if you cannot use
DNS
LPR Print from to the LPR port
RAW(Port9100) Print from the RAW port (Port 9100)
IPP Print over the Internet, including AirPrint
FTP Print over FTP
SNMPv1/v2c Remotely set up and monitor your product
SNMPv3 Remotely set up and monitor your product with the SNMPv3
protocol
Bonjour Settings
Setting Options/Description
Use Bonjour Search for or use devices through Bonjour
Bonjour Name Displays the Bonjour name
Bonjour Service Name Displays the Bonjour service name
Location Displays the Bonjour location name
Top Priority Protocol Selects the protocol that is the top priority for Bonjour printing
SLP Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable SLP Enable the SLP function to use the Push Scan function and
network searching in EpsonNet Config
324
WSD Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable WSD Enable adding devices using WSD, and printing and scanning
from the WSD port
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD printing
between 3 and 3,600 seconds
Scanning Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD scanning
between 3 and 3,600 seconds
Device Name Displays the WSD device name
Location Displays the WSD location name
LLTD Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable LLTD Enable LLTD to display the product in the Windows network
map
Device Name Displays the LLTD device name
LLMNR Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable LLMNR Enable LLMNR to use name resolution without NetBIOS, even
if you cannot use DNS
LPR Settings
Setting Options/Description
Allow LPR Port Printing Allow printing from the LPR port
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for LPR printing between 0 and 3,600
seconds
325
RAW (Port9100) Settings
Setting Options/Description
Allow RAW (Port9100) Printing Allow printing from the RAW port (Port 9100)
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for RAW port (Port 9100) printing
between 0 and 3,600 seconds
IPP Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable IPP Enable IPP communication for products that support IPP are
displayed (you cannot use AirPrint if disabled)
Allow Non-secure Communication Allow the printer to communicate without any security
measures (IPP)
Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for IPP printing between 0 and 3,600
seconds
URL(Network) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the product is
connected using wired LAN or Wi-Fi (the URL is a combined
value of the product’s IP address, Port number, and IPP
printer name)
URL(Wi-Fi Direct) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the product is
connected using Wi-Fi Direct (the URL is a combined value of
the product’s IP address, Port number, and IPP printer name)
Printer Name Displays the IPP printer name
Location Displays the IPP location
FTP Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable FTP Server Enable FTP printing for products that support FTP printing
Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for FTP communication between 0
and 3,600 seconds
326
SNMPv1/v2c Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable SNMPv1/v2c Enable SNMPv1/v2c for products that support SNMPv3
Access Authority Set the access authority when SNMPv1/v2c is enabled to
Read Only or Read/Write
Community Name (Read Only) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII characters
Community Name (Read/Write) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII characters
SNMPv3 Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable SNMPv3 Enable SNMPv3 for products that support SNMPv3
User Name Enter 1 to 32 characters
Authentication Settings Select an algorithm and set a password for authentication
Encryption Settings Select an algorithm and set a password for encryption
Context Name Enter 1 to 32 characters in Unicode (UTF-8)
Parent topic: Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure SSL/TLS communication using Web Config.
Configuring SSL/TLS Settings
Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Configuring SSL/TLS Settings
If your product supports HTTPS, you can configure SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with your
product.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select SSL/TLS > Basic.
3. Select one of the options for the Encryption Strength setting.
327
4. Select Enable or Disable for the Redirect HTTP to HTTPS setting as necessary.
5. If necessary, enable a TLS version.
6. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
7. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product
You can configure a server certificate for your product.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under SSL/TLS, select Certificate.
3. Select one of the following options:
• CA-signed Certificate: Select Import if you have obtained a CA-signed certificate. Choose the
file to import and click OK.
• Self-signed Certificate: Select Update if you have not obtained a CA (Certificate Authority)-
signed certificate and want the product to generate a self-signed certificate.
4. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
About IPsec/IP Filtering
Configuring the Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy
Configuring the Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies
IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings
IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples
Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
328
About IPsec/IP Filtering
You can filter traffic to the product over the network based on IP address, service, and port by
configuring a default policy that applies to every user or group connecting to the product. For control of
individual users or user groups, you can configure group policies.
Note: IPsec is supported only by computers running Windows Vista or later, or Windows Server 2008 or
later.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Configuring the Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy
You can configure the default policy for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Basic.
3. Select Enable to enable IPsec/IP filtering.
4. Select the filtering options you want to use for the default policy.
5. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
6. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Configuring the Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies
You can configure group policies for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Basic.
3. Click a tab number for the policy number you want to configure.
4. Select the Enable this Group Policy checkbox.
5. Select the filtering options you want to use for this group policy.
6. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
7. Click OK.
329
8. If you want to configure additional group policies, click the next tab number and repeat the
configuration steps as necessary.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings
Default Policy Settings
Setting Options/Description
Access Control Permit Access to permit IP packets to pass through
Refuse Access to prevent IP packets from passing
through
IPsec to permit IPsec packets to pass through
Authentication Method Select an authentication method, or select Certificate if
you have imported a CA-signed certificate
Pre-Shared Key If necessary, enter a pre-shared key between 1 and 127
characters long
Encapsulation If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these encapsulation modes:
Transport Mode: if you are using the product on the
same LAN; IP packets of layer 4 or later are encrypted
Tunnel Mode: if you are using the product on an Internet-
capable network, such as IPsec-VPN; the header and
data of IP packets are encrypted
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode) If you selected Tunnel Mode as the Encapsulation
option, enter a gateway address between 1 and 39
characters long
Security Protocol If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these security protocols:
ESP: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data,
and encrypt data
AH: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data; if
data encryption is prohibited, you can use IPsec
330
Group Policy Settings
Setting Options/Description
Access Control Permit Access to permit IP packets to pass through
Refuse Access to prevent IP packets from passing
through
IPsec to permit IPsec packets to pass through
Local Address(Printer) Select an IPv4 or IPv6 address that matches your network
environment; if the IP address is assigned automatically,
select Use auto-obtained IPv4 address
Remote Address(Host) Enter the device's IP address (between 0 and 43
characters long) to control access, or leave blank to
control all addresses; if the IP address is assigned
automatically, such as by DHCP, the connection may be
unavailable, so configure a static address instead
Method of Choosing Port Select the method you want to used for specifying ports
Service Name If you selected Service Name as the Method of
Choosing Port option, select a service name option here;
see the next table for more information
Transport Protocol If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing
Port option, select one of these encapsulation modes:
Any Protocol
TCP
UDP
ICMPv4
See the Group Policy Guidelines table for more
information.
Local Port If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing
Port option, and TCP or UDP for the Transport Protocol
option, enter the port numbers that control receiving
packets (up to 10 ports), separated by commas, for
example 20,80,119,5220; leave this setting blank to
control all ports; see the next table for more information
331
Setting Options/Description
Remote Port If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing
Port option, and TCP or UDP for the Transport Protocol
option, enter the port numbers that control sending
packets (up to 10 ports), separated by commas, for
example 25,80,143,5220; leave this setting blank to
control all ports; see the next table for more information
Authentication Method If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select an authentication method here
Pre-Shared Key If you selected Pre-Shared Key as the Authentication
Method option, enter a pre-shared key between 1 and
127 characters long here and in the Confirm Pre-Shared
Key field
Encapsulation If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these encapsulation modes:
Transport Mode: if you are using the product on the
same LAN; IP packets of layer 4 or later are encrypted
Tunnel Mode: if you are using the product on an Internet-
capable network, such as IPsec-VPN; the header and
data of IP packets are encrypted
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode) If you selected Tunnel Mode as the Encapsulation
option, enter a gateway address between 1 and 39
characters long
Security Protocol If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these security protocols:
ESP: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data,
and encrypt data
AH: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data; if
data encryption is prohibited, you can use IPsec
Group Policy Guidelines
332
Service name Protocol type Local/Remote port
number
Controls these operations
ENPC UDP 3289/Any port Searching for a product from
applications such as printer or
scanner drivers, or EpsonNet Config
SNMP UDP 161/Any port Acquiring and configuring MIB from
applications such as printer or
scanner drivers, or EpsonNet Config
LPR TCP 515/Any port Forwarding LPR data
RAW (Port9100) TCP 9100/any port Forwarding RAW data
IPP/IPPS TCP 631/Any port Forwarding AirPrint data (IPP/IPPS
printing)
WSD TCP Any port/5357 Controlling WSD
WS-Discovery UDP 3702/Any port Searching for a product from WSD
Network Scan TCP 1865/Any port Forwarding scan data from
Document Capture Pro
Network Push Scan TCP Any port/2968 Acquiring job information on push
scanning from Document Capture
Pro
Network Push Scan
Discovery
UDP 2968/Any port Searching for a computer during
push scanning from Document
Capture Pro
FTP Data (Local) TCP 20/Any port Forwarding FTP printing data to FTP
server
FTP Control (Local) TCP 21/Any port Controlling FTP printing to FTP
server
FTP Data (Remote) TCP Any port/20 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to FTP client; controls only
an FTP server that uses remote port
20
FTP Control
(Remote)
TCP Any port/21 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to FTP client
333
Service name Protocol type Local/Remote port
number
Controls these operations
CIFS (Local)* TCP 445/Any port Sharing a network folder on CIFS
server
CIFS (Remote)* TCP Any port/445 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to a folder on CIFS server
NetBIOS Name
Service (Local)
UDP 137/Any port Sharing a network folder on CIFS
server
NetBIOS Datagram
Service (Local)
UDP 138/Any port
NetBIOS Session
Service (Local)
TCP 139/Any port
NetBIOS Name
Service (Remote)
UDP Any port/137 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to a folder on CIFS server
NetBIOS Datagram
Service (Remote)
UDP Any port/138
NetBIOS Session
Service (Remote)
TCP Any port/139
HTTP (Local) TCP 80/Any port Forwarding Web Config and WSD
data to a HTTP or HTTPS server
HTTPS (Local) TCP 443/Any port
HTTP (Remote) TCP Any port/80 Communicating with Epson Connect,
firmware update, and root certificate
update on a HTTP or HTTPS client
HTTPS (Remote) TCP Any port/443
* To control forwarding of scan and received fax data, share a network folder, or receive fax data from
PC-Fax, select Port Number as the Method of Choosing Port option and specify the port numbers for
CIFS and NetBIOS.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples
You can configure IPsec and IP filtering in a variety of ways, as shown in the examples here.
334
Receiving IPsec Packets Only
Use this example only for configuring a default policy.
• IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
• Access Control: IPsec
• Authentication Method: Pre-Shared Key
• Pre-Shared Key: Enter a key up to 127 characters long
Receiving Printing Data and Printer Settings
Use this example to allow communication of printing data and printer settings from specified services.
Default policy:
• IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
• Access Control: Refuse Access
Group policy:
• Access Control: Permit Access
• Remote Address(Host): Client IP address
• Method of Choosing Port: Service Name
• Service Name: Select ENPC, SNMP, HTTP (Local), HTTPS (Local), and RAW (Port9100)
Receiving Access from Only a Specified Address for Product Access
In these examples, the client will be able to access and configure the product in any policy configuration.
Default policy:
• IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
• Access Control: Refuse Access
Group policy:
• Access Control: Permit Access
• Remote Address (Host): Administrator's client IP address
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate
You can configure a certificate for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
335
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Client Certificate.
3. Click Import to add a new client certificate and enter any necessary settings.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect the product to an IEEE 802.1X network using Web
Config.
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Settings
Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Status
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network
If your product supports IEEE 802.1X, you can use it on a network with authentication provided by a
RADIUS server with a hub as an authenticator using Web Config.
Note: TLS version 1.3 does not support this function.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IEEE802.1X, select Basic.
3. Select Enable as the IEEE802.1X (Wired LAN) setting.
4. To use the product on a Wi-Fi network, enable your product's Wi-Fi settings.
The status of the connection is shown as the IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) setting.
Note: You can share the network settings for Ethernet and Wi-Fi networking.
5. Select the IEEE 802.1X setting options you want to use.
6. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
7. Click OK.
336
Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Settings
You can configure these IEEE 802.1X network settings in Web Config.
Setting Options/Description
IEEE802.1X (Wired LAN) Enable or disable settings (IEEE802.1X > Basic)
IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) Displays the IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) connection status
Connection Method Displays the current network connection method
EAP Type Select one of these authentication methods for connections
between the product and a RADIUS server:
EAP-TLS or PEAP-TLS: You must obtain and import a CA-
signed certificate
PEAP/MSCHAPv2 or EAP-TTLS: You must configure a
password
User ID Enter an ID between 1 and 128 ASCII characters for
authentication on a RADIUS server
Password Enter a password between 1 and 128 ASCII characters for
authentication of the product. If you are using Windows as a
RADIUS server, enter up to 127 ASCII characters.
Confirm Password Enter the authentication password again
Server ID Enter a server ID between 1 and 128 ASCII characters for
authentication on a specified RADIUS server; server ID is
verified in the subject/subjectAltName field of a server
certificate sent from the RADIUS server
Certificate Validation Select a valid certificate regardless of the authentication
method; import the certificate using the CA Certificate option
Anonymous Name If you selected EAP-TTLS, PEAP-TLS or PEAP/MSCHAPv2
as the Authentication Method setting, you can configure an
anonymous name between 1 and 128 ASCII characters
instead of a user ID for phase 1 of a PEAP authentication
337
Setting Options/Description
Encryption Strength Select one of the following encryption strengths:
High for AES256/3DES
Middle for AES256/3DES/AES128/RC4
Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network
If your product supports IEEE 802.1X, you can configure a certificate for the network using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IEEE802.1X, select Client Certificate.
3. Click Import to add a new client certificate.
Note: If you have already imported a certificate published by a Certification Authority, you can copy
the certificate and use it in IEEE802.1X. To copy, select Copy From, select the certificate, and then
click Copy.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Status
You can check the status of the IEEE 802.1X network settings by printing a status sheet from your
product.
The network status sheet displays the information in this table for IEEE 802.1X networks.
Status ID Status description
Disable IEEE 802.1X is disabled
EAP Success IEEE 802.1X authentication is confirmed and the network connection is
available
Authenticating IEEE 802.1X authentication in progress
Config Error Authentication failed because the user ID was not set
Client Certificate Error Authentication failed because the client certificate is out of date
338
Status ID Status description
Timeout Error Authentication failed because there is no answer from the RADIUS server
and/or authenticator
User ID Error Authentication failed because the product's user ID and/or certificate
protocol is incorrect
Server ID Error Authentication failed because the server ID on the server certificate and
the server's ID do not match
Server Certificate Error Authentication failed because the server certificate is out of date or the
chain of the server certificate is incorrect
CA Certificate Error Authentication failed because the CA certificate is incorrect, not imported,
or out of date
EAP Failure Authentication failed because the client certificate is incorrect (EAP-TLS
or PEAP-TLS), or the user ID or password is incorrect (PEAP/MSCHAPv2
or EAP-TTLS)
Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Using a Digital Certificate
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure and use digital certificates using Web Config.
About Digital Certification
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate
Updating a Self-signed Certificate
Importing a CA Certificate
Deleting a CA Certificate
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
About Digital Certification
You can configure the following digital certificates for your network using Web Config:
CA-signed Certificate
You can ensure secure communications using a CA-signed certificate for each security feature. The
certificates must be signed by and obtained from a CA (Certificate Authority).
339
CA Certificate
A CA certificate indicates that a third party has verified the identity of a server. You need to obtain a
CA certificate for server authentication from a CA that issues it.
Self-signed Certificate
A self-signed certificate is issued and signed by the product itself. You can use the certificate for only
SSL/TLS communication, however security is unreliable and you may see a security alert in the
browser during use.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
You can obtain a CA-signed certificate by creating a CSR (Certificate Signing Request) using Web
Config and submitting it to a certificate authority. The CSR created in Web Config is in PEM/DER format.
You can import one CSR created from Web Config at a time.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Network Security.
2. Select one of the available network security options and select a certificate option.
3. In the CSR section, select Generate.
4. Select the CSR setting options you want to use.
5. Click OK.
You see a completion message.
6. Select Network Security, select your network security option, and select Certificate again.
7. In the CSR section, click the Download option that matches the format specified by your certificate
authority to download the CSR.
Caution: Do not generate another CSR or you may not be able to import a CA-signed certificate.
8. Submit the CSR to the certificate authority following the format guidelines provided by that authority.
9. Save the issued CA-signed certificate to a computer connected to the product.
Before proceeding, make sure the time and date settings are correct on your product.
10. Select Network Security, select your network security option, and select Certificate or Client
Certificate as necessary.
11. In the CA Certificate section, click Import.
12. Select the format of the certificate as the Server Certificate setting.
340
13. Select the certificate import settings as necessary for the format and the source from which you
obtained it.
14. Click OK.
You see a confirmation message.
15. Click Confirm to verify the certificate information.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
CSR Setup Settings
You can select these settings when setting up a CSR in Web Config.
Note: The available key length and abbreviations vary by certificate authority, so follow the rules of that
authority when entering information in the CSR.
Setting Options/Description
Key Length Select a key length for the CSR
Common Name Enter a name or static IP address from 1 to 128
characters long; for example, Reception printer
or https://10.152.12.225 (you can enter up to five
IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, host names, or
FQDNs by separating them with commas)
Organization, Organizational Unit, Locality,
State/Province
Enter information in each field as necessary, from
0 to 64 characters long in ASCII; separate any
multiple names with commas
Country Enter a two-digit country code number as specified
by the ISO-3166 standard
Sender's Email Address Enter the sender's email address for the mail
server setting(enter the same email address as the
Sender's Email Address in Network > Email
Server > Basic)
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
CSR Import Settings
You can configure these settings when importing a CSR in Web Config.
Note: The import setting requirements vary by certificate format and how you obtained the certificate.
341
Certificate format Setting descriptions
PEM/DER format obtained from Web Config Private Key: Do not configure because the
product contains a private key
Password: Do not configure
CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional
PEM/DER format obtained from a computer Private Key: Configure a private key
Password: Do not configure
CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional
PKCS#12 format obtained from a computer Private Key: Do not configure
Password: Optional
CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Do not
configure
CA-signed Certificate Import Settings
Setting Description
Server Certificate or Client Certificate Select the certificate format.
For an SSL/TLS connection, the Server Certificate
is displayed.
For an IPsec/IP Filtering, IEEE802.1x, or S/MIME
connection, the Client Certificate is displayed.
Note: Depending on your product, not all
connection types may be available.
Private Key If you obtain a certificate of the PEM/DER format
by using a CSR created from a computer, specify a
private key file that matches the certificate.
Password If the file format is Certificate with Private Key
(PKCS#12), enter the password for encrypting the
private key that is set when you obtain the
certificate.
342
Setting Description
CA Certificate 1 If your certificate’s format is Certificate
(PEM/DER), import a certificate from a certificate
authority that issues a CA-signed Certificate to be
used as the server certificate. Specify a file if
necessary.
CA Certificate 2 If your certificate’s format is Certificate
(PEM/DER), import a certificate from the same
certificate authority that issued CA Certificate 1.
Specify a file if necessary.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate
You can delete an imported CA-signed certificate with Web Config when the certificate expires or if you
have no more need for an encrypted connection.
Note: If you obtained a CA-signed certificate from Web Config, you cannot import a deleted certificate;
you must obtain and import a new certificate.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Network Security.
2. Select one of the following network security options and corresponding certificate:
• SSL/TLS and select Certificate
• IPsec/IP Filtering and select Client Certificate
• IEEE802.1X and select Client Certificate
3. Click Delete.
You see a completion message.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Updating a Self-signed Certificate
If your product supports the HTTPS server feature, you can update a self-signed certificate using Web
Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Network Security.
2. Click Update.
343
3. Enter an identifier for your product from 1 to 128 characters long in the Common Name field.
4. Select a validity period for the certificate as the Certificate Validity (year) setting.
5. Click Next.
You see a completion message.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Confirm to verify the certificate information.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Importing a CA Certificate
You can import a CA certificate using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Network Security.
2. Select CA Certificate.
3. Select Import.
4. Select the CA certificate you want to import.
5. Click OK.
When you see the CA Certificate page and the imported certificate is displayed, the import is finished.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Deleting a CA Certificate
You can delete an imported CA certificate with Web Config when the certificate expires or if you have no
more need for an encrypted connection.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Network Security .
2. Select CA Certificate.
3. Locate the certificate you want to remove and click the Delete button next to it.
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
5. Click Reboot Network, and then check that the deleted CA Certificate is not listed on the updated
screen.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
344
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft)
You can set up your product for use with Universal Print if you are using Microsoft 365 and Azure Active
Directory.
Note: This feature is supported on Windows 10 2004 (20H1) or later. Visit the Microsoft website for more
information.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network tab.
2. Select Universal Print.
3. Select Register.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to register your product.
If Web Config shows Registered as the registration status, then setup is complete.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software
With Windows, you can discover and monitor remote devices, and configure network settings in a batch
operation. See the Epson Device Admin help for instructions.
To install Epson Device Admin, download the software from the support page at epson.com/support
(U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and follow the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
345
Solving Problems
Check these sections for solutions to problems you may have using your product.
Viewing the Help Screen
Product Status Messages
Job Status Error Codes
Running a Product Check
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
Solving Setup Problems
Solving Network Problems
Solving Copying Problems
Solving Paper Problems
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Solving Print Quality Problems
Solving Scanning Problems
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Solving Faxing Problems
Solving USB Device Problems
Uninstall Your Product Software
Where to Get Help
Viewing the Help Screen
You can view troubleshooting or how-to topics on the LCD screen at any time.
1. Select the help icon.
2. Select a Troubleshooting or How To option to view instructional images or animations.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Status Messages
You can often diagnose problems with your product by checking the messages and status icons on its
LCD screen. You can also check for errors by pressing the Job/Status button and selecting Printer
Status.
346
Note: If the screen is dark, press the screen to wake the product from sleep mode.
LCD screen message Condition/solution
Printer error. For details, see your
documentation.
Turn the product off and then back on again. If the error persists,
check for and remove any jammed paper or protective materials
from the product. If the error still persists, contact Epson for
support.
If you see any of the following error codes, make sure you have
not exceeded the loading capacity for any paper source:
• 000181
• 000184
• 000201
• 000204
• 000221
• 000224
Printer error. Contact Epson Support.
Non-printing features are available.
The product may be damaged, but non-printing features are still
available. Contact Epson for support.
Paper out in XX. Load paper. Paper
Size: XX/Paper Type: XX
Load the size and type of paper in the paper source indicated.
Too many paper cassette units are
installed. Turn the power off and
uninstall. For details, see your
documentation.
You can install up to three optional paper cassette units.
Remove any extra units.
Unsupported Paper Cassette Units
have been installed. Turn the power
off and uninstall. For details, see
your documentation.
Unsupported optional paper cassette units are installed.
Remove the unsupported units.
Cannot print because XX is out of
order. You can print from another
cassette.
Turn the product off and then back on again. Reinsert the
indicated paper cassette. If the error persists, contact Epson for
support.
347
LCD screen message Condition/solution
The pickup roller in XX is nearing the
end of its service life.
The maintenance rollers need to be replaced periodically for
optimal performance. (Paper may not feed correctly from the
paper cassette or rear paper feed when a maintenance roller is
near the end of its service life.)
The pickup roller in XX has reached
the end of its service life. Replace the
pickup roller, and then perform a
counter reset.
Replace the maintenance rollers and reset the maintenance
roller counter for the paper cassette for which you replaced the
maintenance rollers.
The pickup roller in XX has reached
the end of its service life.
Contact Epson for support.
You need to replace Ink Cartridge(s). Replace the indicated ink cartridges.
The time for maintenance is
approaching. Contact Epson
Support.
Do not attempt to perform maintenance on your own. Contact
Epson for support.
This printer may need a service to
maintain good print quality. Contact
Epson Support.
Do not attempt to perform maintenance on your own. Contact
Epson for support.
Paper Setup Auto Display is set to
Off. Some features may not be
available. For details, see your
documentation.
AirPrint is not available when the Paper Setup Auto Display
setting is disabled. Set the Paper Setup Auto Display setting to
On.
No dial tone is detected. Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the
phone line works. If you connected the product to a PBX (Private
Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal Adapter, change the
Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off
the Dial Tone Detection setting. (Turning off the Dial Tone
Detection setting may cause the product to drop the first digit of
a fax number.)
Failed to receive faxes because the
fax data capacity is full. Touch the
Job/Status at the bottom of the Home
Screen for details.
Press the Job/Status button, select Printer Status, and
resolve any printer errors that prevented faxes from printing.
Make sure the product is connected to a computer or that a USB
device is connected to the product.
348
LCD screen message Condition/solution
The combination of the IP address
and the subnet mask is invalid. See
your documentation for more details.
There is a problem with the network connection to your product.
Set up your product on the network again.
To use cloud services, update the
root certificate from the Epson Web
Config utility.
Access the Web Config utility and update the cloud service root
certificate.
Check that the printer driver is
installed on the computer and that
the port settings for the printer are
correct.
Make sure the printer port is correctly configured. In Windows,
make sure the port is set to a USBXXX setting for a USB
connection or EpsonNet Print Port for a network connection.
Check that the printer driver is
installed on the computer and that
the USB port settings for the printer
are correct.
Recovery mode
Update Firmware
An error has occurred during firmware updating. Connect your
product using a USB cable and try downloading the Firmware
Update from the Epson support site. If you still need help,
contact Epson for support.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related references
Where to Get Help
Related tasks
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Selecting the Line Type
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
349
Job Status Error Codes
If a job does not complete successfully, you can check the error code for the reason. Press the
Job/Status button, select Job Status > Log, and select the incomplete job to display the error code
and additional information.
Code Condition/solution
001 The product was turned off by a power failure.
101 Memory is full. Reduce the size of the print job.
102 Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Clear fonts and macros
from the product's memory using the PDL Font, Macro option from the Settings >
General Settings > System Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data menu,
reduce the size of the print job, or print one copy at a time.
103 Print quality was decreased due to a lack of available memory. If the quality of the printout
is unacceptable, try changing the format setting or simplifying the page by reducing the
number of graphics or the number and size of the fonts.
104 Reverse printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Clear fonts and macros
from the product's memory using the PDL Font, Macro option from the Settings >
General Settings > System Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data menu or
reduce the data size of the print job.
106 Cannot print from the computer due to access control settings. Contact your product
administrator.
107 User authentication failed and the job has been canceled. Contact your product
administrator.
108 Confidential job data was deleted when the product was turned off.
109 The received fax was already deleted.
110 The job was printed 1-sided because the loaded paper does not support 2-sided printing.
Load paper that supports 2-sided printing.
111 Available memory is running low. Reduce the size of the print job.
120 Cannot communicate with a server using an open platform. Check the server or network
for errors.
130 Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Reduce the size of the print
job or try printing one copy at a time.
350
Code Condition/solution
131 Reverse printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Reduce the size of the print
job.
132 Cannot print due to a lack of available memory. Reduce the size of the print data.
133 Cannot print on 2-sides due to a lack of available memory; only one side will be printed.
Reduce the size of the print data.
151 Printing is not performed because the login user name and the user name associated with
the confidential job do not match. Make sure you login with the same user name as the
user name associated with the confidential job.
201 The product's memory is full. You can send pages individually, or print received faxes and
delete them to free up memory space.
202 The line was disconnected by the recipient's fax machine. Wait a moment, then try again.
203 The product cannot detect a dial tone.
Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the phone line works. If you
connected the product to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal
Adapter, change the Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off the
Dial Tone Detection setting. (Turning off the Dial Tone Detection setting may cause the
product to drop the first digit of a fax number.)
204 The recipient's fax machine is busy. Confirm the recipient's fax number, wait a moment,
then try again.
205 The recipient's fax machine does not answer. Wait a moment, then try again.
206 The phone cable is incorrectly connected to the product's LINE and EXT. ports. Connect
the phone cable correctly.
207 The phone cable is not connected. Connect the phone cable.
208 The fax could not be sent to some of the specified recipients.
Print a fax log or Last Transmission report to check which recipients failed to receive the
fax. If the Save Failure Data setting is turned on, you can resend a fax from Job Status in
the Job/Status Menu.
301
401
There is not enough storage space available to save the data in the external memory
device. Clear space on the device, reduce the number of documents, or use a different
device.
351
Code Condition/solution
302
402
The external memory device is write-protected. Disable write protection.
303 No folder is available for saving the scanned file. Create a folder or use a different
memory device.
304
404
An external memory device has been removed. Reinsert the device.
305
405
An error occurred while saving data to an external memory device. Reinsert the memory
device or use a different device.
306
327
The product's memory is full. Wait until current jobs are finished processing.
307 The scanned image size exceeds the maximum limit (Scan to a Memory Device). Lower
the scanning resolution or increase the compression ratio to reduce scanned image size.
311
321
411
421
A DNS error has occurred. Check the DNS settings for the server, computer, or access
point. DNS settings for the server can be checked from the DNS Server option in the
Setup menu. If you cannot clear the problem, contact your product administrator.
312
412
An authentication error has occurred. Check the Server Settings in the Settings menu. If
you cannot clear the problem, contact your product administrator.
313
413
A communication error has occurred. Print a network connection report to check if the
product is connected to the network. Check the email server settings. The authentication
method of the settings and email server may not match. If the authentication method is
disabled, set the authentication method of the email server to None.
314 The data size exceeds the maximum size for the attached files. Increase the Attached
File Max Size setting in the scan settings or lower the file size of the scanned image.
315 The memory is full. Retry after other ongoing jobs have finished.
316 A mail encryption error has occurred. Make sure the encryption setting and printer's time
setting are correct.
317 A mail signature error has occurred. Make sure the encryption setting and printer's time
setting are correct.
352
Code Condition/solution
318 A domain restriction error has occurred. Contact your administrator to check if the domain
of your email destination is restricted.
321 A DNS error has occurred. Check the DNS settings for the server, the computer, or the
access point.
322 An authentication error occurred. Check the Location settings.
323 A communication error has occurred. Check the Location settings or the network
connection.
324 A file with the same name already exists in the specified folder. Delete the duplicate file or
change the file name prefix in File Settings.
325
326
There is not enough storage space available in the specified folder. Increase the storage
space in the specified folder, delete unnecessary files, or lower the file size of the
scanned image.
328 The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist. Check the Location
settings.
331 A communication error occurred. Print a network status report to check the product's
network connection.
332 There is not enough space available for saving the scanned files in the specified folder.
Reduce the number of documents or delete unnecessary files from the specified folder.
333 The destination could not be found because the destination information was uploaded to
the server before sending the scanned data. Select the destination again.
334 An error occurred while sending the scanned data.
341 A communication error has occurred. Make sure the product is connected to the computer
or network correctly. Make sure you have installed Document Capture Pro or Document
Capture. If you cannot clear the problem, contact your product administrator.
350 An FTPS/HTTPS certificate error has occurred. Make sure the date/time and time
difference settings are correct; run Web Config to update the root certificate or import and
update the CA certificate.
422 An authentication error has occurred. Make sure the settings are correct for the
Destination folder selected in Save/Forward Settings in the Receive Settings menu.
353
Code Condition/solution
423 A communication error has occurred. It is also possible that a file with the same name is
open or the file is a read-only file.
Check the network connection, make sure the settings are correct for the Destination
folder selected in Save/Forward Settings in the Receive Settings menu. If you cannot
clear the problem, contact your product administrator.
425 There is not enough storage space available in the forwarding destination folder. Increase
the storage space in the destination folder.
428 The destination was wrong or the destination does not exist. Make sure the settings are
correct for the Destination folder selected in Save/Forward Settings in the Settings
menu.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related tasks
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Selecting the Line Type
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Saving and Viewing Received Faxes
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting User Feature Restrictions (Access Control)
Related topics
Sending Faxes
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Running a Product Check
Running a product check helps you determine if your product is operating properly.
1. Disconnect any interface cables connected to your product.
2. Load plain paper in the product.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Head Nozzle Check > Start.
The nozzle pattern prints.
354
5. Do one of the following, depending on the results of the product check:
• If the page prints and the nozzle check pattern is complete, the product is operating properly. Any
operation problem you may have could be caused by your computer, cable, software, or selected
settings. Check the other solutions in this book or try uninstalling and reinstalling your printer
software.
• If the page prints but the nozzle check pattern has gaps, clean the print head.
• If the page does not print, the product may have a problem. Check the other solutions in this
manual. If they do not work, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Print Quality Adjustment
Uninstall Your Product Software
Related references
Where to Get Help
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
If you have a problem with settings on the product control panel, you can reset them to their factory
defaults. You can choose which settings to reset or reset them all.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings.
3. Scroll down and select System Administration. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Scroll down and select Restore Default Settings.
355
You see a screen like this:
5. Select one of these options:
• Network Settings: Resets all network settings
• Copy Settings: Resets all settings for copying
• Scan Settings: Resets all settings for scanning
• Fax Settings: Resets all settings for faxing
• Clear All Data and Settings: Resets all control panel settings including the contacts list
You see a confirmation screen.
6. Select Yes to reset the selected settings. (Select No if you want to cancel the operation.)
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solving Setup Problems
Check these sections if you have problems while setting up your product.
Product Does Not Turn On or Off
Noise After Ink Installation
Software Installation Problems
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Does Not Turn On or Off
If you cannot turn the product on or off, try these solutions:
• If you cannot turn on your product, make sure the power cord is securely connected and hold down
the power button a little longer.
356
• If you cannot turn off your product, hold down the power button a little longer. If you still cannot turn off
your product, unplug the power cord, plug the power cord back in, then turn your product on and off
again using the power button.
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Noise After Ink Installation
If you hear noises from your product after installing ink, check the following:
• The first time you install ink, the product must charge its print head. Wait until charging finishes before
you turn off the product, or it may charge improperly and use excess ink the next time you turn it on.
• If the product's print head stops moving or making noise, and the charging process has not finished
after approximately 5 minutes, turn off your product. Turn it back on and check to see if charging is still
in progress. If it is still in progress, contact Epson for help.
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Software Installation Problems
If you have problems while installing your product software, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and any necessary cables are securely connected at both ends. If
you still have problems installing software, disconnect the cable and carefully follow the instructions on
the Start Here sheet. Also make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system.
• Close any other programs, including screen savers and virus protection software, and install your
product software again.
• In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the correct port is shown in
the printer properties.
• If you see any error message or your software does not install correctly in Windows, you may not have
software installation privileges. Contact your system administrator.
• If you are printing over a network, make sure your product is set up properly on the network.
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Related references
Windows System Requirements
Mac System Requirements
Solving Network Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems setting up or using your product on a network.
357
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is
not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We
recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window
Cannot Print Over a Network
Cannot Scan Over a Network
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
If your product has trouble finding or connecting to a wireless router or access point, try these solutions:
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit or does not appear, make sure you select one of the WPS options from
the product control panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• Verify that your router or access point is operating correctly by connecting to it from your computer or
another device.
• You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access
point.
• Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router.
• Check to see if access restrictions, such as MAC address filtering, are set on the router or access
point. If access restrictions are set, add your product's MAC address to your router's address list. To
obtain your product's MAC address, print a network status sheet. Then follow the instructions in your
router or access point documentation to add the address to the list.
• If your router or access point does not broadcast its network name (SSID), follow the instructions that
came with your product to enter your wireless network name manually.
• If your router or access point has security enabled, determine the kind of security it is using and any
required password or passphrase for connection. Then make sure to enter the exact WEP key or WPA
passphrase correctly.
358
• Check if your computer is restricting the available wireless channels. If so, verify that your wireless
access point is using one of the usable channels and change to a usable channel, if necessary.
• If you are using a Wi-Fi Direct connection that suddenly disconnects, the Wi-Fi Direct password on
your device may have been changed. If necessary, delete the existing DIRECT-xxxxxxxx connection
settings from your device and enter a new password. See your device documentation for instructions.
• If you connected your product to a Windows computer using Wi-Fi Direct and it automatically selected
Access Point Mode, you may have trouble accessing a low-priority Internet connection. Check the
network connection or adapter settings in the Windows Control Panel and set the Internet metric
setting to 100 for your version of the Internet Protocol.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Related tasks
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
If EpsonNet Setup cannot find your product on a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your network. Verify the connection using your
product control panel.
• Check if your network name (SSID) contains non-ASCII characters. Your product cannot display non-
ASCII characters.
• Make sure your product is not connected to a guest network.
• If necessary, reinstall your product software and try running EpsonNet Setup again:
1. Reset your product's network settings to their factory defaults.
2. Windows only: Uninstall your product software.
3. Restart your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router, so note the next step before restarting it.
359
4. Download your product software from the Epson website using the instructions on the Start Here
sheet.
• If you have replaced your router, reinstall your product software to connect to the new router.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
• Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is
preventing detection of your device over the network. See your router or access point documentation
for instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
• Try accessing any website from your computer or smart device to make sure that your device's
network settings are correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer or
smart device. Check the network connection of the computer or smart device. See the documentation
provided with the computer or smart device for details.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts
Uninstall Your Product Software
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window
If your product does not appear in the Mac printer window, try these solutions:
• Turn your product off, wait 30 seconds, then turn it back on again.
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control
panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• If you are connecting the product wirelessly via EpsonNet Setup and you do not see the Wi-Fi antenna
icon with connection bars on your LCD screen, make sure your product software was installed
correctly. If necessary, reinstall your software.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
360
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for instructions.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts
Uninstall Your Product Software
Cannot Print Over a Network
If you cannot print over a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure that your product is turned on.
• Make sure you install your product's network software as described in your product documentation.
• Print a network status sheet and verify that the network settings are correct. If the network status is
Disconnected, check any cable connections and turn your product off and then on again.
• If you are using TCP/IP, make sure the product's IP address is set correctly for your network. If your
network does not assign IP addresses using DHCP, set the IP address manually.
• Make sure your computer and product are both using the same wireless network.
• If network printing is slow, print a network status sheet and check the signal strength. If it is poor, place
your product closer to your router or access point. Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven,
cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
• Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router.
• Check if there are any paused print jobs.
• Make sure your printer is selected as the default printer.
• Check if the selected printer port is correct.
361
• Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is
preventing printing from a device over the network. See your router or access point documentation for
instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control
panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• Check your wired LAN router or access point to see if the LED for the port to which your product is
connected is on or flashing. If the link LED is off, try the following:
• Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely connected to your product and to your router, access
point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting your product to a different port or a different router, access point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting with a different Ethernet cable.
• Try printing to your product from another computer on the network.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
• If you are connecting the product via EpsonNet Setup and the Wi-Fi icon does not appear lit on the
LCD screen, make sure your product software was installed correctly. If necessary, reinstall your
software.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related concepts
Uninstall Your Product Software
Related tasks
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
362
Cannot Scan Over a Network
If you have problems scanning over a network, try these solutions:
• If you cannot scan from your product control panel, make sure you restarted your computer after
installing the product software. Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your
firewall or security software.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
• If you are scanning a large original at a high resolution, a network communication error may occur. Try
scanning again at a lower resolution.
• If network communication was interrupted while starting Epson Scan 2, exit Epson Scan 2, wait a few
seconds, and restart it. If Epson Scan 2 cannot restart, turn off your product, turn it back on, and try
restarting Epson Scan 2 again.
• Check the scanner setting and reset the connection if necessary using Epson Scan 2 Utility:
Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Scan 2 Utility and select it. Make sure your product is
selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is
selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen, select EPSON, and select Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make
sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows (other versions): Click or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson
Scan 2 > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other
tab and click Reset.
Mac: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make
sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
• You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access
point.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
363
Related tasks
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Solving Copying Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems copying with your product.
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies
If your product makes a noise, but nothing copies, try these solutions:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• If the nozzle check page does not print, but the product's power is on, make sure your product
software is installed correctly.
• Make sure your product is level (not tilted).
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Nozzle Check
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While
Your product is performing routine maintenance. This is normal.
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder
If your originals do not feed when placed in the ADF, try these solutions:
• Make sure the ADF icon lights up on the Copy, Fax, or Scan screen on the LCD screen. If not, reload
the originals.
364
• Make sure the size, weight, and number of your originals are supported by the ADF.
• Make sure the originals are loaded correctly.
• Make sure the document is not curled or creased.
• Try cleaning the inside of the ADF.
• Do not load originals above the arrow mark on the ADF edge guide.
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Related references
Paper Feeding Problems
Paper Jams Inside the Product
Related tasks
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
Cleaning Your Product
Solving Paper Problems
Check these sections if you have problems using paper with your product.
Paper Feeding Problems
Paper Jams Inside the Product
Paper Ejection Problems
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Paper Feeding Problems
If you have problems feeding paper, try these solutions:
• If paper does not feed for printing, remove it from the rear feed slot or cassette. Reload it, then adjust
the edge guides. Make sure the paper stack is not above the arrow mark on the edge guides inside the
cassette or rear feed slot.
• Place the product on a flat surface and operate it in the recommended environmental conditions.
• Be sure to insert the paper cassette all the way into your product.
• If multiple pages feed at once, remove the paper, fan the edges to separate the sheets, and reload it.
• Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets. For plain paper, do not load paper above
the arrow mark on the edge guides.
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
365
• If paper jams when you print on both sides of the paper, try loading fewer sheets.
• Run the paper guide cleaning utility to clean the paper path.
• If paper does not feed correctly after replacing the maintenance rollers, make sure you installed the
maintenance rollers correctly.
• If you installed an optional paper cassette unit, be sure to enable the cassette unit in the printing
software.
• If your product pauses during printing, make sure the front cover is closed.
• The maintenance rollers may be at the end of their service life. Check the maintenance roller status
and replace them if necessary.
• Do not use short-grain paper with a width less than .413 inches (105 mm).
• For best results, follow these guidelines:
• Use new, smooth, high-quality paper that is not curled, creased, old, too thin, or too thick.
• Load paper in the cassette printable side down.
• Do not load binder paper with holes in the cassette.
• Follow any special loading instructions that came with the paper.
• Use long-grain paper. If you are not sure what type of paper you are using, check the paper
packaging or contact the manufacturer to confirm the paper specifications.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Jams Inside the Product
Paper Loading Capacity
Paper Specifications
Related tasks
Cleaning the Paper Guide
Related topics
Loading Paper
Paper Jams Inside the Product
If you see a message that paper has jammed in the product, follow the on-screen instructions to locate
and remove the jammed paper.
366
Take the following precautions when removing jammed paper from the product:
• Remove the jammed paper carefully. Using too much force may damage the product.
• Unless specifically instructed, avoid tilting the product, placing it on its side, or turning it upside down,
as ink may spill.
Warning: Never touch the buttons on the control panel while your hand is inside the product. If the
product starts operating, it may cause an injury. Do not touch any protruding parts inside the product.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related topics
Loading Paper
Paper Ejection Problems
If you have problems with paper ejecting properly, try these solutions:
• If paper does not eject fully, you may have set the wrong paper size. Cancel printing to eject the paper.
Select the correct paper size when you reprint.
• If paper is wrinkled when it ejects, it may be damp or too thin. Load new paper and be sure to select
the correct paper type setting when you reprint.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Related tasks
Cancelling Printing Using a Product Button
Related topics
Loading Paper
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Check these sections if you have problems while printing from your computer.
Note: For problems while printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer
software, see the sections covering that software in this manual.
Nothing Prints
367
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar
Printing is Slow
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Nothing Prints
If you have sent a print job and nothing prints, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your computer.
• Make sure any interface cables are connected securely at both ends.
• If you connected your product to a USB hub, make sure it is a first-tier hub. If it still does not print,
connect your product directly to your computer instead of the hub.
• Make sure the printer status is not offline or pending.
• Run a product check to see if a test page prints. If the test page prints, check to see if your product
software is installed correctly.
• Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you are printing a high-
resolution image, you may need more than the minimum requirements. Print the image at a lower
resolution or if necessary, increase your system's memory.
• In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the printer port setting
matches the printer connection port.
• In Windows, delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler. Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in
the printer settings window, and cancel any stalled print jobs.
• On a Mac, make sure the printer is added to the printer list and the printer is not paused.
• Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program.
• You can try to clear the problem by updating the product software to the latest version. If the problem
persists, try uninstalling and reinstalling the printer driver.
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Related tasks
Running a Product Check
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Using AirPrint
368
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar
If you do not see your product icon in the Windows taskbar, first try restarting your computer. If that does
not work, try this solution:
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name and select Printing preferences.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printing preferences.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name, select Printing Preferences, and select
your product name again if necessary.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name, select
Printing Preferences, and select your product name again if necessary.
2. Click the Maintenance tab.
3. Click the Extended Settings button.
4. Select Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3 and click OK.
5. Click the Monitoring Preferences button.
6. Click the checkbox for the option that adds the shortcut icon to the taskbar.
7. Click OK to close the open program windows.
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Printing is Slow
If printing becomes slow, try these solutions:
• Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you are printing a high-
resolution image, you may need more than the minimum requirements. If necessary, increase your
system's memory.
• If you are using Windows 7, close the Devices and Printers window before you print.
• Make sure Quiet Mode is turned off.
• Clear space on your hard drive or run a defragmentation utility to free up existing space.
• Close any programs you are not using when you print.
369
• If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead.
• If printing becomes slower after printing continuously for a long time, the product may have
automatically slowed down to protect the print mechanism from overheating or becoming damaged.
Let the product rest with the power on for 30 minutes, then try printing again.
• If you are printing over a wireless network, factors such as interference, network traffic, or weak signal
strength may affect your printing speed.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
• If using the PostScript printer driver, set the Print Quality setting to Fast.
For the fastest printing, select the following settings in your product software:
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Turn on any high speed settings in your product software.
• Select a lower print quality setting.
• Make sure the ink drying time has not been increased for double-sided printing.
• Windows: Click the Maintenance or Utility tab, select Extended Settings or Speed and Progress,
and select the following settings:
• Always Spool RAW Datatype
• Page Rendering Mode
• Print as Bitmap
• Windows: Select Printing preferences, click the More Options tab, and make sure the
Bidirectional printing setting is enabled.
• Mac: Select System Preferences or System Settings, select Printers & Scanners, and select your
product. Select Options & Supplies, select Options (or Driver), and enable the Bidirectional
printing setting.
If printing is still slow and you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista, try the following:
1. Click and select Computer or My Computer. Double-click the C: drive and open these folders:
ProgramData > EPSON > PRINTER.
370
Note: If you do not see the ProgramData folder, open the Organize menu and select Folder and
search options. In the window that appears, click the View tab, select Show hidden files, folders,
and drives in the Advanced settings list, and click OK.
2. Right-click the EPAUDF01.AUD file and select Delete.
3. Restart your computer and try printing again.
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Related references
Windows System Requirements
Mac System Requirements
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Check these sections if you have problems with the layout or content of your printed pages.
Inverted Image
Too Many Copies Print
Blank Pages Print
Incorrect Margins on Printout
Incorrect Characters Print
Incorrect Image Size or Position
Slanted Printout
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Inverted Image
If your printed image is inverted unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Turn off any mirror or inversion settings in your printing application.
• Turn off the Mirror Image, Flip horizontally, or Reverse page orientation settings in your printer
software. (This option has different names, depending on your operating system version.)
371
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Too Many Copies Print
Make sure that the Copies setting in your printing program or printer software is not set for multiple
copies.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Blank Pages Print
If blank pages print unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software.
• If a blank page exists in a document you are printing and you want to skip printing it, select the Skip
Blank Page setting in your printer software, if available.
• Run a print head nozzle check to see if any of the nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Nozzle Check
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
372
Incorrect Margins on Printout
If your printed page has incorrect margins, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software.
• Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program.
• Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the product.
• When placing originals on the scanner glass, align the corner of the original with the corner indicated
by the arrow. If the edges of the copy are cropped, move the original slightly away from the corner.
• Clean the scanner glass and the document cover. If there is dust or stains on the glass, the copy area
may extend to include the dust or stains.
You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Related topics
Loading Paper
Incorrect Characters Print
If incorrect characters appear in your prints, try these solutions before reprinting:
• Make sure any cables are securely connected at both ends.
• In Windows, delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler. Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in
the printer settings window, and cancel any stalled print jobs.
• If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead.
• If your computer entered sleep mode the last time you printed, the next print job after your computer
exits sleep mode may contain garbled characters. Print your document again.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Incorrect Image Size or Position
If your printed image is the wrong size or in the wrong position, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size and layout settings in your printing program and printer
software.
373
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size on the control panel.
• Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the printer.
• Slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper.
• Clean the scanner glass and document cover.
• Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program.
• Be sure to select the appropriate original size setting for your original in the copy settings.
You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Cleaning Your Product
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac
Slanted Printout
If your printouts are slanted, try these solutions:
• Slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper.
• Select a higher print quality setting in your printer software.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Align the print head.
• Adjust the print quality.
• Make sure the product is not printing while tilted or at an angle.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Related topics
Loading Paper
374
Solving Print Quality Problems
Check these sections if your printouts have problems with print quality, but your image looks fine on your
computer screen.
White or Dark Lines in Printout
Blurry or Smeared Printout
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps
Grainy Printout
Incorrect Colors
Parent topic: Solving Problems
White or Dark Lines in Printout
If you notice white or dark lines in your prints (also called banding), try these solutions before you reprint:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Align the print head. If print quality does not improve after aligning the print head, disable the
bidirectional (high speed) setting.
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
• If you continue to see horizontal bands or streaks in your printouts after cleaning the print head and
adjusting the print quality, make print quality adjustments for each paper type.
• If you are copying from the ADF, copy from the scanner glass instead or use a higher quality setting.
• You may need to replace the ink cartridges.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Quality Adjustment
Print Head Cleaning
Print Head Nozzle Check
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
375
Related tasks
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Related topics
Loading Paper
Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Blurry or Smeared Printout
If your printouts are blurry or smeared, try these solutions:
• Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product.
• Slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.
• Use a support sheet with special paper, or load special paper one sheet at a time.
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
• Use Epson papers to ensure proper saturation and absorption of genuine Epson inks.
• Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets. For plain paper, do not load above the
line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide.
• Make sure the paper type setting in your product software matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• If you are printing on thick paper or envelopes, turn on the Thick Paper setting from the control panel
or select Thick Paper and Envelopes in the Extended Settings of the printer software. (Turning this
setting on will decrease print speed.)
• In Windows, if the paper is still smeared after selecting the Thick Paper and Envelopes setting,
select the Short Grain Paper setting in the Extended Settings of the printer software.
• Remove each sheet from the output tray as it is printed.
• Avoid handling printouts on glossy paper right after printing to allow the ink to set.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• If you print on both sides of a sheet of paper, smudges may appear on the reverse side of heavily
saturated or dark images. If one side of a sheet will contain a lighter image or text, print that side first.
Make sure the ink has dried before reloading the paper to print on the other side. Adjust the density
and/or ink drying time settings.
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
376
• Align the print head. If print quality does not improve, disable the bidirectional setting.
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
• Clean the paper path.
• Do not press too hard on the original or the document cover when you are scanning originals on the
scanner glass.
• Clean the scanner glass.
• If you are copying from the ADF, place your originals on the scanner glass instead.
• Clean the ADF.
Note: Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place it on a flat, stable surface that
extends beyond the base of the product in all directions.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Quality Adjustment
Print Head Cleaning
Related references
Paper Specifications
Compatible Epson Papers
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps
If your printouts are faint or have gaps, try these solutions:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• The ink cartridge(s) may be old or low on ink, and you may need to replace them.
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product.
• Align the print head.
377
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Print Quality Adjustment
Print Head Nozzle Check
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Cleaning the Paper Guide
Related topics
Loading Paper
Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Grainy Printout
If your printouts are grainy, try these solutions:
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• Select a higher print quality setting and turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Align the print head.
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
• You may need to increase the image resolution or print a smaller size; see your software
documentation.
Note: Images from the Internet may be low resolution and not result in a high quality printout.
• If you enlarged the image size in an image-editing program, you need to increase the image resolution
setting to retain a high image quality. Increase the image resolution by the same amount you increase
the image size. For example, if the image resolution is 300 dpi (dots per inch) and you will double the
image size for printing, change the resolution setting to 600 dpi.
378
Note: Higher resolution settings result in larger file sizes, which take longer to process and print.
Consider the limitations of your computer system when selecting a resolution, and select the lowest
possible resolution that produces acceptable quality to keep file sizes manageable.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Cleaning
Print Quality Adjustment
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Alignment
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Related topics
Loading Paper
Incorrect Colors
If your printouts have incorrect colors, try these solutions:
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper you loaded.
• Make sure the Black/Grayscale or Grayscale setting is not selected in your printer software.
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• The ink cartridges may be old or low on ink, and you may need to replace them.
• After you print, the colors in your printout need time to set as the ink dries. During this time, the colors
may look different than you expect. To speed up drying time, do not stack your printouts on top of each
other.
• Your printed colors can never exactly match your on-screen colors. However, you can use a color
management system to get as close as possible. Try using the color management options in your
printer software.
• Select Custom as the Color Correction setting on the More Options tab of the printer software, then
click Advanced. Try changing the Scene Correction setting to something other than Automatic. If
379
changing that setting does not work, change the Color Management setting to any color correction
method other than PhotoEnhance.
• If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, try adjusting the Color Mode setting on the
Advanced tab of the printer software.
• For best results, use genuine Epson paper.
• Remove any dust or dirt on the originals and clean the scanner glass.
• Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related concepts
Print Head Nozzle Check
Print Head Cleaning
Related references
Compatible Epson Papers
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Additional Layout and Print Options - Windows
Managing Color - Mac
Solving Scanning Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems scanning with your product.
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly
Cannot Start Epson Scan 2
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly
If your scanning software does not operate correctly, try these solutions:
• Make sure your computer has adequate memory and meets the system requirements for your
operating system.
• Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart your scanning software.
380
• If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall your scanning software, try reinstalling it.
• In Windows, make sure your product is listed as a valid device in the Scanners and Cameras control
panel.
• Try scanning at a lower resolution or increase the free space on the computer's hard disk. Scanning
stops if the total data size reaches the limit.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems
Related concepts
Uninstall Your Product Software
Related tasks
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
Cannot Start Epson Scan 2
If you cannot start Epson Scan 2, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and any interface cables are securely connected at both ends.
• If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead.
• If you scan at a high resolution over a network, a communication error may occur. Lower the
resolution.
• If you are scanning with the ADF, check that the document cover and ADF cover are closed.
• Make sure Epson Scan 2 is selected as your scanning program.
• Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart Epson Scan 2.
• Check the connection setting and test the connection using Epson Scan 2 Utility:
Windows 11: Click , search for Epson Scan 2 Utility and select it. Make sure the correct product
is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is
selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct
product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
381
Windows (other versions): Click or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan
2 > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other
tab and click Reset.
Mac: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make
sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
• Make sure you do not have multiple versions of Epson Scan 2 installed. If you do, uninstall both
versions and install one version.
• If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall Epson Scan 2, try reinstalling it.
• If the user restriction feature (Access Control) is enabled, a user ID and password are required to
scan. If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems
Related tasks
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Check these sections if a scanned image on your computer screen has a quality problem.
Note: For solutions when using Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac)
software, see the Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) help utility.
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked
Image is Distorted or Blurry
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges
Image is Too Dark
Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image
Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped
Parent topic: Solving Problems
382
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only
If your scanned image consists only of a few dots, try these solutions:
• Make sure you placed your original for scanning facing the correct way.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White, adjust the Threshold and scan again.
• Remove any lint or dirt from your original.
• Clean the scanner glass.
• Do not press on the original or the document cover with too much force.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related references
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images
If a line of dots appears in all your scanned images, try these solutions:
• Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the
cloth, if necessary. Paper towels are not recommended.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the scanner glass.
• Make sure any interface cables are securely connected at both ends.
• Remove any dust or dirt that may have adhered to your original.
• Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.
• Keep the document cover closed to prevent dirt or dust from getting inside.
If you are scanning from the ADF, make sure the ADF edge guides fit against the loaded originals. You
can also try cleaning the ADF and scanning again.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related tasks
Cleaning Your Product
383
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked
If straight lines in an original appear crooked in a scanned image, make sure to place your original
straight when you scan it.
If you are scanning from the ADF, make sure the ADF edge guides fit against the loaded originals. You
can also try cleaning the ADF and scanning again.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Image is Distorted or Blurry
If a scanned image appears distorted or blurry, try these solutions:
• Make sure your original is not wrinkled or warped. This may prevent the original from laying flat on the
scanner glass.
• Do not move your original or your product during scanning.
• Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place your product on a flat, stable
surface that extends beyond its base in all directions.
• Adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Increase the Resolution setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White, adjust the Threshold setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Color or Grayscale, select the Unsharp Mask setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White, select Text Enhancement. If the Image Type setting is
Color or Grayscale, change the Text Enhancement setting to High.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related references
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges
If you are scanning a thick or warped original, cover its edges with paper to block external light as you
scan it.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
384
Image is Too Dark
If your scanned image is too dark, try these solutions:
• If the Image Type is set to Color or Grayscale, adjust the Brightness setting.
• Check the brightness and contrast settings of your computer monitor.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related references
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image
If an image from the back of a thin original appears in your scanned image, try these solutions:
• Place a piece of black paper on the back of the original and scan it again.
• Adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Select the Advanced Settings tab and adjust the Brightness setting.
• If the Image Type is set to Black & White, select Text Enhancement. If the Image Type is set to
Color or Grayscale, change the Text Enhancement setting to High.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related references
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image
You may see a ripple pattern (called a moiré) in scanned images of printed documents. This is caused
by interference from differing pitches in the scanner's screen and your original's halftone screen. To
reduce this effect, adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Select the Descreening setting.
• Select a lower Resolution setting.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related references
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab
385
Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors
Printed colors can never exactly match the colors on your computer monitor because printers and
monitors use different color systems: monitors use RGB (red, green, and blue) and printers typically use
CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black).
Check the color matching and color management capabilities of your computer, display adapter, and the
software you are using to see if they are affecting the palette of colors you see on your screen.
To adjust the colors in your scanned image, adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try
scanning again:
• If the Image Type setting is Color or Grayscale, adjust the Contrast setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White or Grayscale, adjust the Color Enhance setting.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related references
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped
If the edges of a scanned image are cropped, make sure your original is placed correctly for scanning. If
necessary, move your original away from the edges of the scanner glass slightly.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related topics
Placing Originals on the Product
Solving Faxing Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems faxing with your product.
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product
Fax Memory Full Error Appears
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size
Received Fax is Not Printed
Parent topic: Solving Problems
386
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
If you cannot send or receive faxes, try these solutions:
• If an error code is displayed on the control panel, try the solutions suggested in the error code list.
• If you are faxing from a computer, use the Epson FAX Utility to send your fax.
• Make sure the recipient's fax machine is turned on and working.
• Make sure paper is loaded correctly in your product.
• Make sure you have set up your header information and have not blocked your caller ID. Otherwise,
your faxes might be rejected by the recipient's fax machine.
• If you did not connect a telephone to your product, set the Receive Mode setting to Auto so you can
receive faxes automatically.
• Check that the cable connecting your telephone wall jack to your product's LINE port is secure.
• Print a fax connection report using your product control panel or fax software to help diagnose the
problem.
• Verify that the telephone wall jack works by connecting a phone to it and testing it.
• If there is no dial tone and you connected the product to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) phone line
or Terminal Adapter, change the Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off the
product's dial tone detection setting. (Turning off the dial tone setting may cause the product to drop
the first digit of a fax number.)
• If you connected your product to a DSL phone line, you must connect a DSL filter to the phone jack to
enable faxing over the line. Contact your DSL provider for the necessary filter.
• If your telephone line has static, turn off your product's error correction mode fax communication
setting and try faxing again.
• Try lowering your product's fax speed setting.
• Make sure the error correction mode (ECM) setting is turned on if you are trying to send or receive a
color fax.
• If your telephone line uses call waiting and you have trouble receiving faxes, turn off call waiting to
prevent disruption of incoming faxes.
• If you have subscribed to a call forwarding service, the product may not be able to receive faxes.
Contact your service provider for assistance.
• Check your inbox and delete faxes after reading or printing them. If the inbox is full, the product cannot
receive faxes.
387
• When you have made settings to save received faxes to a computer, turn on the computer. The
received fax is deleted once it has been saved to the computer.
• When sending faxes using the subaddress feature, ask the recipient if their fax machine can receive
faxes using this feature. Check that the subaddress and password are correct, and that they match
with the recipient subaddress and password. Check this when receiving faxes as well.
• When receiving faxes using the subaddress feature, make sure the fax rejection settings are not
rejecting the fax.
• If you cannot receive A3-size faxes, make sure you selected the correct paper size setting for the
paper source containing the A3-size paper. Also, be sure to enable the paper source to receive faxes
as the Auto Select Settings option.
• If you are receiving faxes using the Epson FAX Utility, check that your product is registered as a fax
product in your operating system:
Windows: Make sure the product appears in Devices and Printers, Printer, or Printers and Other
Hardware. If the product does not appear, uninstall and re-install the Epson FAX Utility.
Mac: Select System Preferences or System Settings > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan or
Print & Fax) and make sure your product appears. If your product does not appear, click + and add
your product. If the product does appear, double-click it and make sure it is not paused.
Note: If your product is connected to a VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) phone line, keep in mind that
fax machines are designed to work over analog phone lines. Epson cannot guarantee that fax
transmission will work when using VoIP.
If your phone line includes voice mail answering services, calls or faxes may be inadvertently received
by your voice mail service.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related references
Job Status Error Codes
Related tasks
Selecting the Line Type
Printing Fax Reports
Receiving Faxes Automatically
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Saving and Viewing Received Faxes
388
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows
Related topics
Loading Paper
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product
If you cannot receive faxes when a telephone is connected to your product, try these solutions:
• Make sure your telephone is connected to your product's EXT port.
• Make sure the Receive Mode is set to Manual.
Note: When answering a call that is a fax, wait until the product's LCD screen displays a message that a
connection has been made before you hang up.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Fax Memory Full Error Appears
If you see an error message telling you that the product's fax memory is full, try these solutions:
• If you set the product to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, delete any faxes you
have already read.
Note: Your product can store up to 200 faxes before its inbox is full.
• If you set the product to save received faxes on a computer, turn on the selected computer. Once the
faxes are saved on the computer, they are deleted from the product's memory.
• If you set the product to save received faxes on a USB device, connect the selected USB device
containing the save fax folder to the product. Once the faxes are saved on the USB device, they are
deleted from the product's memory.
Note: Make sure the USB device has enough available memory and is not write protected.
• If the memory is full, try the following:
• Send a monochrome fax using the direct sending feature
• Send your fax using the on hook feature
• Send your faxes in smaller batches
389
• If the product cannot print a received fax due to a product error, such as a paper jam, the memory full
error may appear. Clear any product errors, then ask the sender to resend the fax.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Related tasks
Saving and Viewing Received Faxes
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size
If your recipient receives a fax in an incorrect size, try these solutions:
• If you are trying to fax an A3-size document, make sure the recipient's fax machine supports the paper
size. If the message OK (Reduced Size) appears in the fax transmission report, the recipient's fax
machine does not support A3-size documents.
• If you are sending a fax using the scanner glass, make sure your original is placed correctly and that
the correct paper size is selected on the control panel.
• Clean the scanner glass and document cover.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related tasks
Cleaning Your Product
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Received Fax is Not Printed
If a received fax is not printed, try these solutions:
• Make sure the product is free of errors. The product cannot print received faxes if an error has
occurred with the product, such as a paper jam.
• If the product has been set to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, received faxes
are not automatically printed. Check the Receive Settings options on the product control panel and
change them, if necessary.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related references
Receive Settings - Fax
390
Solving USB Device Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems using USB devices with your product.
Cannot View or Print from a USB Device
Cannot Save Files on a USB Device
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Cannot View or Print from a USB Device
If you cannot view or print photos or documents from a USB device connected to your product, try these
solutions:
• Make sure memory devices are enabled on the product.
• Make sure your device is compatible with the product.
• Make sure the files on your device are in the correct format.
Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems
Related references
External USB Device Specifications
Interface Specifications
Related topics
Transferring Files on a USB Device
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Cannot Save Files on a USB Device
If you cannot save files on a USB device connected to your product, try these solutions:
• To save faxes on a USB device, create a folder in the Fax Output settings on the product control
panel.
• Make sure the device is not write-protected.
• Make sure the device has enough available space.
• Make sure memory devices are enabled on your product.
• Make sure the device is compatible with the product.
Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems
391
Related references
Interface Specifications
Receive Settings - Fax
Related topics
Transferring Files on a USB Device
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device
If you have problems transferring files to or from a USB device connected to your product, try these
solutions:
• Make sure your device is compatible with the product.
• Make sure the device is not write-protected.
• Make sure your product is securely connected to your computer.
• Make sure that the file sharing setting for your product is enabled.
Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems
Related references
Interface Specifications
Related topics
Transferring Files on a USB Device
Uninstall Your Product Software
If you have a problem that requires you to uninstall and re-install your software, follow the instructions for
your operating system.
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
You can uninstall and then re-install your product software to solve certain problems.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Close any open programs or applications.
3. Disconnect any interface cables.
392
4. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Settings and select it. Select Apps or System > Apps &
features. Then select the program you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Apps or System > Apps & features. Then
select the program you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Programs > Programs
and Features. Select the uninstall option for your Epson product, then select Uninstall/Change.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
Select your product again, if necessary, then select OK, and click Yes to confirm the
uninstallation.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
EPSON, select your product, then click EPSON Printer Software Uninstall.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
In the next window, select your product and click OK. Then follow any on-screen instructions.
5. Do one of the following to uninstall Epson Scan 2, then follow any on-screen instructions:
• Windows 11/Windows 10: Select Epson Scan 2 and click Uninstall.
• Windows 8.x/Windows 7/Windows Vista: Select Epson Scan 2 and click Uninstall/Change.
• Windows 8.x/Windows 7: Select Epson Scan 2 and click Uninstall/Change.
6. Do one of the following to uninstall Epson ScanSmart, then follow any on-screen instructions:
• Windows 11/Windows 10: Select Epson ScanSmart and click Uninstall.
• Windows 8.x/Windows 7: Select Epson ScanSmart and click Uninstall/Change.
7. Restart your computer, then re-install your software.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
393
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
In most cases, you do not need to uninstall your product software before re-installing it. However, you
can download the Uninstaller utility from the Epson support website to uninstall your product software as
described here.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
1. To download the Uninstaller utility, visit epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and
select your product.
2. Click Downloads.
3. Select your operating system, click Utilities, locate the Uninstaller utility, and click Download.
4. Run the file you downloaded.
5. Double-click the Uninstaller icon.
6. In the Epson Uninstaller screen, select the checkbox for each software program you want to
uninstall.
7. Click Uninstall.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.
9. Reinstall your product software.
Note: If you uninstall the printer driver and your product name remains in the Print & Fax, Print & Scan,
or Printers & Scanners window, select your product name and click the – (remove) icon to remove it.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
Where to Get Help
If you need to contact Epson for technical support services, use the following support options.
Internet Support
Visit Epson's support website at epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and select
your product for solutions to common problems. You can download drivers and documentation, get
FAQs and troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.
394
Speak to a Support Representative
Before you call Epson for support, please have the following information ready:
• Product name
• Product serial number (located on a label on the product)
• Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase
• Computer configuration
• Description of the problem
Then call:
• U.S.: (562) 276-4382, 7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday
• Canada: (905) 709-3839, 7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday
Days and hours of support are subject to change without notice. Toll or long distance charges may
apply.
Purchase Supplies and Accessories
You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales) or epson.ca (Canadian
sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call
800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
395
Technical Specifications
These sections list the technical specifications for your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or
this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.
Windows System Requirements
Mac System Requirements
Paper Specifications
Printable Area Specifications
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Scanning Specifications
Fax Specifications
Ink Cartridge Specifications
Dimension Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Interface Specifications
External USB Device Specifications
Network Interface Specifications
Safety and Approvals Specifications
PostScript Fonts
PCL Fonts
PCL Mode 5 Symbol Sets
Windows System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your computer should use one of these Microsoft operating
systems:
• Windows 11
• Windows 10
• Windows 8.x
• Windows 7
396
• Windows Server 2022
• Windows Server 2019
• Windows Server 2016
• Windows Server 2012 R2
• Windows Server 2012
• Windows Server 2008 R2
• Windows Server 2008
Note: For the latest product software available for your operating system, visit the Epson support site at
epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada), select your product, and select Downloads.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Mac System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your Mac should use one of these operating systems:
• macOS 14.x
• macOS 13.x
• macOS 12.x
• macOS 11.x
• macOS 10.15.x
• macOS 10.14.x
• macOS 10.13.x
• macOS 10.12.x
• OS X 10.11.x
• OS X 10.10.x
• OS X 10.9.5.x
Note: For the latest product software available for your operating system, visit the Epson support site at
epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada), select your product, and select Downloads.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
397
Paper Specifications
Note: Since the quality of any particular brand or type of paper may be changed by the manufacturer at
any time, Epson cannot guarantee the quality of any non-Epson brand or type of paper. Always test a
sample of paper stock before purchasing large quantities or printing large jobs.
Single-sheets
Size A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm)
B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
Paper types Plain paper and paper distributed by Epson
Weight Plain paper: 17 lb (64 g/m
2
) to 24 lb (90 g/m
2
)
Thick paper: 25 lb (91 g/m
2
) to 68 lb (256 g/m
2
)
398
Envelopes
Size No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
DL (8.66 × 4.33 inches [110 × 220 mm])
C6 (4.5 × 6.4 inches [114 × 162 mm])
Paper types Plain bond paper
Weight 20 lb (75 g/m
2
) to 27 lb (100 g/m
2
)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Related references
Paper Loading Capacity
Printable Area Specifications
Single sheets
1 Top/bottom/right/left: 0.12 inch (3 mm) minimum
2 Reduced print quality area/top: 1.81 inches (46 mm) minimum
3 Reduced print quality area/bottom: 2.00 inches (51 mm) minimum
400
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Paper size A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]) landscape size
1
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]) landscape size
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
(Maximum size 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
Paper type Plain paper, high-quality paper, or recycled paper
Paper weight 14 lb (52 g/m
2
) to 34 lb (128 g/m
2
)
Sheet feeding capacity Total thickness: 0.20 inch (5.0 mm)
Approximately 50 sheets
1
Single-sided scanning only
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Scanning Specifications
Scanner type Flatbed
Photoelectric device CIS
Effective pixels 14040 × 20400 pixels (1200 dpi)
Document size Maximum: 11.7 × 17 inches (297 × 431.8 mm)
Scanner glass: A3 or Legal
401
Scanning resolution 1200 dpi (main scan)
2400 dpi (sub scan)
Output resolution 50 to 9600 in 1 dpi increments
Image data Color:
30 bits per pixel (10 bits per pixel per color) internal
24 bits per pixel (8 bits per pixel per color) external
Grayscale:
10 bits per pixel internal
8 bits per pixel external
Light source LED
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Fax Specifications
Fax type Walk-up black-and-white and color fax capability (ITU-T Super
Group 3)
Support lines Standard analog phone lines
PBX (Private Branch Exchange) telephone systems
Speed Up to 33.6 kbps
Resolution Monochrome
Standard: 203 pixels per inch × 98 lines per inch (8 pixels per mm ×
3.85 lines per mm)
Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 196 lines per inch (8 pixels per mm × 7.7
lines per mm)
Super Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch (8 pixels per mm
× 15.4 lines per mm)
Ultra Fine: 406 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch (16 pixels per mm
× 15.4 lines per mm)
Color
200 × 200 dpi
402
Compression method Monochrome
MH/MR/MMR
Color
JPEG
Communication standards G3
SuperG3
Sending paper size Scanner
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
ADF
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
Recording paper size A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
Transmission speed
1
Approximately 3 seconds (A4 ITU-T chart No.1 Standard MMR 33.6
kbps)
403
Page memory
2
Up to 550 pages (when an ITU-T No. 1 chart is received in
monochrome standard mode)
Contacts Number of Contacts
Up to 2000
Number of Grouped Contacts
Up to 200
Redial
3
2 times (with 1 minute intervals)
Interface RJ-11 Phone Line
RJ-11 Telephone set connection
1
Actual speed depends on the document, recipient's device, and the status of the phone line
2
Retained during a power outage
3
Specifications may differ by country or region
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Ink Cartridge Specifications
Note: Your printer is designed to work only with genuine Epson-brand ink cartridges. Other brands of ink
cartridges and ink supplies are not compatible and, even if described as compatible, may not function
properly or at all. Epson periodically provides firmware updates to address issues of security,
performance, minor bug fixes and ensure the printer functions as designed. These updates may affect
the functionality of third-party ink. Non-Epson branded or altered Epson cartridges that functioned prior
to a firmware update may not continue to function.
The included initial cartridges are designed for reliable printer setup and cannot be used as replacement
cartridges or resold. After setup, the remaining ink is available for printing. Yields are based on ISO
24711 in default mode, printing continuously. Yields vary due to print images, settings, and
temperatures. Printing infrequently or primarily with one color reduces yields. All cartridges must be
installed with ink for printing and printer maintenance. For print quality, some ink remains in replaced
cartridges.
Color Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
404
Cartridge life Opened package: 6 months
Unopened package: do not use if the date on the package has
expired
Temperature Storage: –4 to 104 °F (–20 to 40 °C)
1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Ink freezes at –9.4 °F (–23 °C)
1
Ink thaws and is usable after 3 hours at 77 °F (25 °C)
1
Depending on the color, ink may partially freeze at 0 °C or lower. Can store for one month at 104 °F (40
°C)
Note: For best printing results, use up a cartridge within 6 months of opening the package.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Related references
Ink Cartridge Part Numbers
Dimension Specifications
Height Storage: 19.4 inches (493 mm)
Stored with one optional paper cassette installed: 24.4 inches (620
mm)
Stored with two optional paper cassettes installed: 29.4 inches (748
mm)
Stored with three optional paper cassettes and cabinet installed:
45.7 inches (1162 mm)
Printing: 22.5 inches (571 mm)
Printing with one optional paper cassette installed: 27.5 inches (698
mm)
Printing with two optional paper cassettes installed: 32.5 inches (826
mm)
Printing with three optional paper cassettes and cabinet installed:
48.8 inches (1240 mm)
405
Width Storage: 24.1 inches (613 mm)
Printing: 24.1 inches (613 mm)
With three optional paper cassettes and cabinet installed: 30.4
inches (772 mm)
Depth Storage: 25.6 inches (650 mm)
Stored with three optional paper cassettes and cabinet installed:
31.4 inches (797 mm)
Printing: 33.9 inches (862 mm)
Printing with three optional paper cassettes and cabinet installed:
34.2 inches (869 mm)
Weight
(without ink cartridges or power
cord)
101.6 lb (46.1 kg)
With one optional paper cassette installed: 127.4 lb (57.8 kg)
With two optional paper cassettes installed: 153.0 lb (69.4 kg)
With three optional paper cassettes and cabinet installed: 231.7 lb
(105.1 kg)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Power supply rating AC 100 to 240 V
Rated frequency range 50 to 60 Hz
Rated current 1.6 to 0.8 A
Power consumption (with USB
Connection)
1
Standalone copying: Approximately 39 W (ISO/IEC24712)
Ready mode: Approximately 18 W
Sleep mode: Approximately 1.0 W
Power off mode: Approximately 0.1 W
1
When four optional paper cassettes (C1 to C4) are installed
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
406
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Operating: 50 to 95 °F (10 to 35 °C)
Storage: –4 to 104 °F (–20 to 40 °C)
1
1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
1
Humidity
(without condensation)
Operating: 20 to 80% RH
Storage: 5 to 85% RH
1
Can store for one month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Interface Specifications
Interface type SuperSpeed USB
Hi-Speed USB (for external USB devices)
Note: Epson cannot guarantee all operations of externally connected devices.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Related references
External USB Device Specifications
External USB Device Specifications
Do not use devices with the following requirements:
• Dedicated driver
• Security settings, such as password or encryption, etc.
• Built-in USB hub
Hard disk drive
1
USB memory device
Multi-card reader
2
2TB
Formatted in FAT, FAT32, or exFAT
407
1
We do not recommend using external USB devices that are powered by USB. Use only external USB
devices with independent AC power sources.
2
Only insert one memory card into the multi-card reader. Multi-card readers with more than two memory
cards inserted are not supported.
Note: Epson cannot guarantee all operations of externally connected devices.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Network Interface Specifications
Wi-Fi
Standards IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
1
/ac
Frequency ranges IEEE802.11b/g/n: 2.4 GHz
IEEE802.11a/n/ac: 5.0 GHz
Channels Wi-Fi
2.4 GHz: 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13
5.0 GHz: W52 (36/40/44/48), W53 (52/56/60/64), W56
(100/104/108/112/116/120/124/128/132/136/140), W58
(149/153/157/161/165)
Wi-Fi Direct
2.4 GHz: 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13
5.0 GHz: W52 (36/40/44/48), W58 (149/153/157/161/165)
Connection modes Infrastructure mode
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
2
; not supported for IEEE 802.11b
Security protocols
Wi-Fi Direct only supports
WPA2-PSK (AES)
WEP (64/128bit), WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA3-SAE (AES),
WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise
(Complies with WPA2 standards with support for WPA/WPA2
Personal)
1
Only available for the HT20
2
Infrastructure and Wi-Fi Direct modes or an Ethernet connection can be used simultaneously
408
Ethernet
Standards IEEE802.3i (10BASE-T)
1
IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
1
IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)
1
IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet); the connected device
should be IEEE802.3az compliant
Communication mode Auto, 10Mbps Full duplex, 10Mbps Half duplex, 100Mbps Full
duplex, 100Mbps Half duplex
Connector RJ-45
1
Use a category 5e or higher STP (Shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent risk of radio interference
Network Functions and IPv4/IPv6
Network Printing EpsonNet Print (Windows): IPv4
Standard TCP/IP (Windows): IPv4, IPv6
WSD Printing (Windows): IPv4, IPv6
Bonjour Printing (Mac OS): IPv4, IPv6
IPP Printing (Windows, Mac OS): IPv4, IPv6
FTP Printing: IPv4, IPv6
Epson Connect (Email Print, Remote Print): IPv4
AirPrint (iOS 5 or later, Mac OS)
1
: IPv4, IPv6
Network Scanning Epson Scan 2: IPv4, IPv6
Document Capture Pro (Windows): IPv4
Epson Connect (Scan to Cloud): IPv4
AirPrint (Scan)
1
: IPv4, IPv6
Fax Send a fax: IPv4
Receive a fax: IPv4
Epson Connect (Fax to Cloud): IPv4
AirPrint (Faxout)
1
: IPv4, IPv6
409
1
OS X Mavericks (10.9.5) or later
Security
IEEE802.1X; requires the connected device to comply with IEEE802.1x
IPsec/IP Filtering
SSL/TLS; either HTTPS Server/Client or IPPS
TLS Version; 1.3, 1.2, 1.1 (disabled by default), or 1.0 (disabled by default)
SMTPS (STARTTLS, SSL/TLS)
SNMPv3
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Safety and Approvals Specifications
United States Safety: UL62368-1
EMC: FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B
Canada Safety: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 62368-1
EMC: CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B)
This equipment contains the following wireless module:
• Manufacturer: Seiko Epson Corporation.
• Type: J26H005
This product conforms to Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Epson cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and
away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed
outdoors is subject to licensing.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment
and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102
of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated so that
410
the radiator is kept at least 7.9 inches (20 cm) or more away from a person's body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
PostScript Fonts
Font name Family HP equivalent
Nimbus Mono Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Courier
Letter Gothic Medium, Bold, Italic, Letter Gothic
Nimbus Mono PS Regular, Bold, Oblique, Bold
Oblique
CourierPS
Nimbus Roman No4 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Times
URW Classico Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Omega
URW Coronet — Coronet
URW Clarendon Condensed — Clarendon Condensed
URW Classic Sans Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers
URW Classic Sans
Condensed
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers Condensed
Antique Olive Medium, Bold, Italic Antique Olive
Garamond Antiqua, Halbfett, Kursiv, Kursiv
Halbfett
Garamond
Mauritius — Marigold
Algiers Medium, Extra Bold Albertus
NimbusSansNo2 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Arial
Nimbus Roman No9 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times New Roman
Nimbus Sans Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold
Oblique
Helvetica
Nimbus Sans Narrow Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold
Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
Palladio Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Palatino
411
Font name Family HP equivalent
URW Gothic Book, Demi, Book Oblique, Demi
Oblique
ITC Avant Garde
URW Bookman Light, Demi, Light Italic, Demi
Italic
ITC Bookman
URW Century Schoolbook Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic New Century Schoolbook
Nimbus Roman Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times
URW Chancery Medium Italic — ITC Zapf Chancery Italic
Symbol — Symbol
URW Dingbats — Wingdings
Dingbats — ITC Zapf Dingbats
Standard Symbol — SymbolPS
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
PCL Fonts
Scalable Fonts
Font name Family HP equivalent Symbol set
Nimbus Mono Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Courier 1
Letter Gothic Medium, Bold, Italic, Letter Gothic 1
Nimbus Mono PS Regular, Bold, Oblique,
Bold Oblique
CourierPS 3
Nimbus Roman No4 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
CG Times 2
URW Classico Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
CG Omega 3
URW Coronet — Coronet 3
URW Clarendon
Condensed
— Clarendon Condensed 3
412
Font name Family HP equivalent Symbol set
URW Classic Sans Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Univers 2
URW Classic Sans
Condensed
Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Univers Condensed 3
Antique Olive Medium, Bold, Italic Antique Olive 3
Garamond Antiqua, Halbfett, Kursiv,
Kursiv Halbfett
Garamond 3
Mauritius — Marigold 3
Algiers Medium, Extra Bold Albertus 3
NimbusSansNo2 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Arial 3
Nimbus Roman No9 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Times New 3
Nimbus Sans Medium, Bold, Oblique,
Bold Oblique
Helvetica 3
Nimbus Sans Narrow Medium, Bold, Oblique,
Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow 3
Palladio Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Palatino 3
URW Gothic Book, Demi, Book
Oblique, Demi Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Gothic 3
URW Bookman Light, Demi, Light Italic,
Demi Italic
ITC Bookman 3
URW Century
Schoolbook
Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
New Century Schoolbook 3
Nimbus Roman Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold
Italic
Times 3
URW Chancery
Medium Italic
— ITC Zapf Chancery Medium
Italic
3
Symbol — Symbol 4
413
Font name Family HP equivalent Symbol set
URW DingBats — Wingdings 5
Dingbats — ITC Zapf Dingbats 6
Standard Symbol — SymbolPS 4
URW David Medium, Bold HP David 7
URW Narkis Medium, Bold HP Narkis 7
URW Miryam Medium, Bold, Italic HP Miryam 7
URW Koufi Medium, Bold Koufi 8
URW Naskh Medium, Bold Naskh 8
URW Ryadh Medium, Bold Ryadh 8
Bitmap Font
Line Printer, Symbol set 9
OCR/Barcode Bitmap Font (PCL5 Mode Only)
Font name Family Symbol set
OCR A — 10
OCR B — 11
Code 39 9.37cpi, 4.68cpi 12
EAN/UPC Medium, Bold 13
Note: Depending on the print density, or quality and color of the paper, the OCR/Barcode Bitmap fonts
may not be readable. Print a sample and check for readability before printing large quantities.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
PCL Mode 5 Symbol Sets
Your product can access a variety of symbol sets. Many of these symbol sets differ only in the
international characters specific to each language.
414
Note: Since most software handles fonts and symbols automatically, you may never need to adjust your
product settings. However, if you write your own product control programs, or if you use older software
that cannot control fonts, refer to these tables for details on the symbol sets.
When you consider which font to use, also consider which symbol set to combine with the font.
Symbol set name Attribute Font classification
Norweg1 0D 1, 2, 3
Roman Extension 0E 9
Italian 0I 1, 2, 3
EMC94-1 0N 1, 2, 3, 9
Swedis2 0S 1, 2, 3
ANSI ASCII 0U 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
UK 1E 1, 2, 3
French2 1F 1, 2, 3
German 1G 1, 2, 3
Legal 1U 1, 2, 3, 9
8859-2 ISO 2N 1, 2, 3, 9
Spanish 2S 1, 2, 3
ISO 8859/4 Latin 4 4N 1, 2, 3
Roman-9 4U 1, 2, 3
PsMath 5M 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
8859-9 ISO 5N 1, 2, 3, 9
WiTurkish 5T 1, 2, 3
MsPublishin 6J 1, 2, 3
VeMath 6M 1, 2, 3
8859-10ISO 6N 1, 2, 3, 9
DeskTop 7J 1, 2, 3
Math-8 8M 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
415
Symbol set name Attribute Font classification
Roman-8 8U 1, 2, 3, 9
WiE.Europe 9E 1, 2, 3
Pc1004 9J 1, 2, 3
8859-15ISO 9N 1, 2, 3, 9
PcTk437 9T 1, 2, 3
Windows 9U 1, 2, 3
PsText 10J 1, 2, 3
IBM-US 10U 1, 2, 3, 9
IBM-DN 11U 1, 2, 3, 9
McText 12J 1, 2, 3
PcMultiling 12U 1, 2, 3, 9
VeInternati 13J 1, 2, 3
PcEur858 13U 1, 2, 3
VeUS 14J 1, 2, 3
PiFont 15U 1, 2, 3
PcE.Europe 17U 1, 2, 3
Unicode 3.0 18N 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
WiBALT 19L 1, 2, 3
WiAnsi 19U 1, 2, 3
PcBlt775 26U 1, 2, 3
Pc866Cyr 3R 1, 2
Greek8 8G 1, 2
WinGrk 9G 1, 2
WinCyr 9R 1, 2
Pc851Grk 10G 1, 2
ISOCyr 10N 1, 2, 9
416
Symbol set name Attribute Font classification
Pc8Grk 12G 1, 2
ISOGrk 12N 1, 2
Pc866Ukr 14R 1, 2
Hebrew7 0H 1, 7
8859-8 ISO 7H 1, 7
Hebrew8 8H 1, 7
Pc862Heb 15H 1, 7
PC-862, Hebrew 15Q 1, 7
Arabic8 8V 8
HPWARA 9V 8
Pc864Ara 10V 8
Symbol 19M 4
Wingdings 579L 5
ZapfDigbats 14L 6
OCR A 0O 10
OCR B 1O 11
OCR B Extension 3Q 11
Code3-9 0Y 12
EAN/UPC 8Y 13
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
417
Notices
Check these sections for important notices about your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or
this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.
Important Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver
Trademarks
Copyright Notice
Important Safety Instructions
Before using your Epson product, read and follow these safety instructions.
General Product Safety Instructions
Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions
Parent topic: Notices
General Product Safety Instructions
• Be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
• Use only the type of power source indicated on the product's label.
• Use only the power cord that comes with the product. Do not use the cord with any other equipment.
Using another cord or using the provided cord with other equipment may cause fires or shock.
• Make sure the AC power cord meets the relevant local safety standard.
• Place the product near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.
• Avoid plugging the product into an outlet on the same circuit as a photo copier or air control system
that regularly switches on and off, or on an outlet controlled by a wall switch or timer.
418
• Do not let the power cord become damaged or frayed. Place it to avoid abrasions, cuts, fraying,
crimping, and kinking. Do not place objects on top of it and do not allow it to be stepped on or run over.
Be careful to keep the cord straight at each end.
• If you use an extension cord with the product, make sure the total ampere rating of the devices
plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the cord's ampere rating. Also, make sure the total
ampere rating of all devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the wall outlet's ampere
rating.
• Always turn off the product using the power button, and wait until the power light stops flashing before
unplugging the product or cutting off power to the electrical outlet.
• If you will not be using the product for a long period, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Place the product on a flat, stable surface that extends beyond its base in all directions. It will not
operate properly if it is tilted or at an angle.
• Allow space behind the product for the cables, and space above the product so that you can fully raise
the document cover.
• Leave enough space in front of the product for the paper to be fully ejected.
• Avoid locations that are subject to rapid changes in heat or humidity, shocks or vibrations, or dust.
• Do not place or store the product outdoors.
• Do not place the product near excessive heat sources or in direct sunlight.
• Leave enough room around the product for sufficient ventilation. Do not block or cover openings in the
case or insert objects through the slots.
• Keep the product away from potential sources of electromagnetic interference, such as loudspeakers
or the base units of cordless telephones.
• When connecting the product to a computer or other device with a cable, ensure the correct
orientation of the connectors. Each connector has only one correct orientation. Inserting a connector
in the wrong orientation may damage both devices connected by the cable.
• Do not sit or lean on the product. Do not place heavy objects on the product.
• Do not move the printhead by hand; this may damage the product.
• Do not put your hands inside the product while it is printing.
• Do not spill liquid on the product or use the product with wet hands.
• Do not use aerosol products that contain flammable gases inside or around the product. Doing so may
cause fire.
• Do not press too hard on the scanner glass when placing originals.
419
• Do not open the scanner section while the product is copying, printing, scanning, or performing any
other functions.
• Except as specifically explained in your documentation, do not attempt to service or disassemble the
product yourself.
• Unplug the product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: if
the power cord or plug is damaged; if liquid has entered the product; if the product has been dropped
or the case damaged; if the product does not operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in
performance. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions.
• When storing or transporting the product, do not tilt it, stand it on its side, or turn it upside down;
otherwise, ink may leak.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions
• Keep ink cartridges and maintenance box out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.
• Be careful when you handle used ink cartridges; there may be ink remaining around the ink supply
port. If ink gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and water. If it gets in your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If you experience discomfort or vision problems after flushing your eyes, see a
doctor immediately. If ink gets in your mouth, see a doctor immediately.
• Do not put your hand inside the product or touch any cartridges during printing.
• Do not turn off the product during ink charging. If ink charging is incomplete, you may not be able to
print.
• Install a new ink cartridge immediately after removing an expended one. Leaving cartridges
uninstalled can dry out the print head and may prevent the product from printing.
• Do not remove or tear the label on the cartridge; this can cause leakage.
• Do not drop or knock ink cartridges against hard objects; this can cause leakage.
• Do not remove the transparent seal from the bottom of the cartridge. This may cause the cartridge to
become unusable.
• Do not disassemble or modify the ink cartridge; you may not be able to print normally.
• Do not break the hooks on the side of the cartridge when removing it from the packaging.
• Do not touch the green IC chip on the side of the cartridge. This may prevent normal operation.
• Do not shake cartridges too vigorously; this can cause them to leak.
• If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and store it in
the same environment as the product. Note that there is a valve in the ink supply port, making covers
420
or plugs unnecessary, but care is needed to prevent the ink from staining items that the cartridge
touches. Do not touch the ink cartridge ink supply port or surrounding area.
• Use an ink cartridge before the date printed on its package or within six months of opening the
package, whichever is earlier.
• Do not dismantle an ink cartridge. This could damage the print head.
• Keep the ink cartridges out of direct sunlight.
• Store ink cartridges in a cool, dark place; do not store the ink cartridges in high or freezing
temperatures.
• Make sure to install all ink cartridges. The printer only works when all ink cartridges are properly
installed.
• After bringing an ink cartridge inside from a cold storage site, allow it to warm up at room temperature
for at least three hours before using it.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
Radio waves from this product may adversely affect the operation of medical equipment or automatically
controlled devices, such as pacemakers, automatic doors or fire alarms. When using this product near
such devices or inside a medical facility, follow the directions from authorized staff members at the
facility, and follow all posted warnings and directions on the device to avoid causing an accident.
Do not connect this product to the internet directly. Connect it to a network protected by a router or
firewall.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
• Use only a dry, soft cloth to clean the LCD screen. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers.
• If the LCD screen is damaged, contact Epson. If the liquid crystal solution gets on your hands, wash
them thoroughly with soap and water. If the liquid crystal solution gets into your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems remain after a thorough flushing, see a doctor
immediately. If liquid enters your mouth, see a doctor immediately.
• Do not press too hard on the LCD screen or subject it to heavy impacts.
• Do not use a pointy or sharp object, such as a pen or your fingernail, to operate the LCD screen.
• If the LCD screen chips or cracks, do not touch or attempt to remove the broken pieces; contact Epson
for support.
421
• Do not subject your product to sudden changes in temperature or humidity; this may cause
condensation to develop inside the LCD screen and degrade its performance.
• The LCD screen may contain a few small bright or dark spots, and may display uneven brightness.
These are normal and do not indicate that the screen is damaged in any way.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions
When using telephone equipment, you should always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk
of fire, electric shock, and personal injury, including the following:
• Do not use the Epson product near water.
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Caution: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
For United States Users
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ("ACTA"). On the surface of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If
requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
Applicable certification jack Universal Service Order Codes ("USOC") for the equipment: RJ11C.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must
comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant
telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a
compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number
of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone
company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product
422
identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a
decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't practical,
the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your
right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that
could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance
notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you have problems with this product and require technical or customer support, please visit
www.epson.com for more information.
This product is not intended to be repaired by the customer. If you experience trouble connecting this
equipment to a telephone line, please contact:
Name: Epson America, Inc.
Address: 3131 Katella Ave., Los Alamitos, CA 90720 U.S.A.
Telephone: (562) 981-3840
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you
disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to
party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what
will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other
number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
To comply with this law, you must enter the following information in your fax unit. Click the link below or
see the Faxing section of this guide for instructions on doing this.
• Date and time
423
• Name and telephone number which identify the source of your fax transmission
According to the FCC's electrical safety advisory, we recommend that you may install an AC surge
arrester in the AC outlet to which this equipment is connected. Telephone companies report that
electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment
connected to AC power sources and that this is a major nationwide problem.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC
Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits
established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded
equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has more than one interface connector, do
not leave cables connected to unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
For Canadian Users
1. This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical
specifications.
2. The Ringer Equivalence Number indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected
to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d’Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada.
424
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs qui peuvent
être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme des IES de tous les dispositifs
n’excède pas cinq.
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Parent topic: Notices
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver
1. DISPUTES, BINDING INDIVIDUAL ARBITRATION, AND WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND
CLASS ARBITRATIONS
1.1 Disputes. The terms of this Section 1 shall apply to all Disputes between you and Epson. The term
"Dispute" is meant to have the broadest meaning permissible under law and includes any dispute, claim,
controversy or action between you and Epson arising out of or relating to this Agreement, Epson
branded products (hardware and including any related software), or other transaction involving you and
Epson, whether in contract, warranty, misrepresentation, fraud, tort, intentional tort, statute, regulation,
ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. "DISPUTE" DOES NOT INCLUDE IP CLAIMS, or more
specifically, a claim or cause of action for (a) trademark infringement or dilution, (b) patent infringement,
(c) copyright infringement or misuse, or (d) trade secret misappropriation (an "IP Claim"). You and Epson
also agree, notwithstanding Section 1.6,that a court, not an arbitrator, may decide if a claim or cause of
action is for an IP Claim.
1.2 Binding Arbitration. You and Epson agree that all Disputes shall be resolved by binding arbitration
according to this Agreement. ARBITRATION MEANS THAT YOU WAIVE YOUR RIGHT TO A JUDGE
OR JURY IN A COURT PROCEEDING AND YOUR GROUNDS FOR APPEAL ARE LIMITED.
Pursuant to this Agreement, binding arbitration shall be administered by JAMS, a nationally recognized
arbitration authority, pursuant to its code of procedures then in effect for consumer related disputes, but
excluding any rules that permit joinder or class actions in arbitration (for more detail on procedure, see
Section 1.6 below). You and Epson understand and agree that (a) the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C.
§1, et seq.) governs the interpretation and enforcement of this Section 1, (b) this Agreement
memorializes a transaction in interstate commerce, and (c) this Section 1 shall survive termination of this
Agreement.
1.3 Pre-Arbitration Steps and Notice. Before submitting a claim for arbitration, you and Epson agree to
try, for sixty (60) days, to resolve any Dispute informally. If Epson and you do not reach an agreement to
resolve the Dispute within the sixty (60) days), you or Epson may commence an arbitration. Notice to
Epson must be addressed to: Epson America, Inc., ATTN: Legal Department, 3131 Katella Ave., Los
Alamitos, CA 90720 (the "Epson Address"). The Dispute Notice to you will be sent to the most recent
address Epson has in its records for you. For this reason, it is important to notify us if your address
changes by emailing us at [email protected] or writing us at the Epson Address above. Notice of
425
the Dispute shall include the sender's name, address and contact information, the facts giving rise to the
Dispute, and the relief requested (the "Dispute Notice"). Following receipt of the Dispute Notice, Epson
and you agree to act in good faith to resolve the Dispute before commencing arbitration.
1.4 Small Claims Court. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may bring an individual action in the small
claims court of your state or municipality if the action is within that court's jurisdiction and is pending only
in that court.
1.5 WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND CLASS ARBITRATIONS. YOU AND EPSON AGREE THAT
EACH PARTY MAY BRING DISPUTES AGAINST THE OTHER PARTY ONLY IN AN INDIVIDUAL
CAPACITY, AND NOT AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR
REPRESENTATIVE PROCEEDING, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FEDERAL OR STATE
CLASS ACTIONS, OR CLASS ARBITRATIONS. CLASS ACTION LAWSUITS, CLASS-WIDE
ARBITRATIONS, PRIVATE ATTORNEY-GENERAL ACTIONS, AND ANY OTHER PROCEEDING
WHERE SOMEONE ACTS IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY ARE NOT ALLOWED.
ACCORDINGLY, UNDER THE ARBITRATION PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION, AN
ARBITRATOR SHALL NOT COMBINE OR CONSOLIDATE MORE THAN ONE PARTY'S CLAIMS
WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ALL AFFECTED PARTIES TO AN ARBITRATION
PROCEEDING.
1.6 Arbitration Procedure. If you or Epson commences arbitration, the arbitration shall be governed by
the rules of JAMS that are in effect when the arbitration is filed, excluding any rules that permit arbitration
on a class or representative basis (the "JAMS Rules"), available at http://www.jamsadr.com or by calling
1-800-352-5267, and under the rules set forth in this Agreement. All Disputes shall be resolved by a
single neutral arbitrator, and both parties shall have a reasonable opportunity to participate in the
selection of the arbitrator. The arbitrator is bound by the terms of this Agreement. The arbitrator, and not
any federal, state or local court or agency, shall have exclusive authority to resolve all disputes arising
out of or relating to the interpretation, applicability, enforceability or formation of this Agreement,
including any claim that all or any part of this Agreement is void or voidable. Notwithstanding this broad
delegation of authority to the arbitrator, a court may determine the limited question of whether a claim or
cause of action is for an IP Claim, which is excluded from the definition of "Disputes" in Section 1.1
above. The arbitrator shall be empowered to grant whatever relief would be available in a court under
law or in equity. The arbitrator may award you the same damages as a court could, and may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only in favor of the individual party seeking relief and only to the extent
necessary to provide relief warranted by that party's individual claim. In some instances, the costs of
arbitration can exceed the costs of litigation and the right to discovery may be more limited in arbitration
than in court. The arbitrator's award is binding and may be entered as a judgment in any court of
competent jurisdiction.
You may choose to engage in arbitration hearings by telephone. Arbitration hearings not conducted by
telephone shall take place in a location reasonably accessible from your primary residence, or in Orange
County, California, at your option.
426
a) Initiation of Arbitration Proceeding. If either you or Epson decides to arbitrate a Dispute, both parties
agree to the following procedure:
(i) Write a Demand for Arbitration. The demand must include a description of the Dispute and the amount
of damages sought to be recovered. You can find a copy of a Demand for Arbitration at
http://www.jamsadr.com ("Demand for Arbitration").
(ii) Send three copies of the Demand for Arbitration, plus the appropriate filing fee, to: JAMS, 500 North
State College Blvd., Suite 600 Orange, CA 92868, U.S.A.
(iii) Send one copy of the Demand for Arbitration to the other party (same address as the Dispute
Notice), or as otherwise agreed by the parties.
b) Hearing Format. During the arbitration, the amount of any settlement offer made shall not be disclosed
to the arbitrator until after the arbitrator determines the amount, if any, to which you or Epson is entitled.
The discovery or exchange of non-privileged information relevant to the Dispute may be allowed during
the arbitration.
c) Arbitration Fees. Epson shall pay, or (if applicable) reimburse you for, all JAMS filings and arbitrator
fees for any arbitration commenced (by you or Epson) pursuant to provisions of this Agreement.
d) Award in Your Favor. For Disputes in which you or Epson seeks $75,000 or less in damages exclusive
of attorney's fees and costs, if the arbitrator's decision results in an award to you in an amount greater
than Epson's last written offer, if any, to settle the Dispute, Epson will: (i) pay you $1,000 or the amount
of the award, whichever is greater; (ii) pay you twice the amount of your reasonable attorney's fees, if
any; and (iii) reimburse you for any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing the Dispute in arbitration. Except as
agreed upon by you and Epson in writing, the arbitrator shall determine the amount of fees, costs, and
expenses to be paid by Epson pursuant to this Section 1.6d).
e) Attorney's Fees. Epson will not seek its attorney's fees and expenses for any arbitration commenced
involving a Dispute under this Agreement. Your right to attorney's fees and expenses under Section
1.6d) above does not limit your rights to attorney's fees and expenses under applicable law;
notwithstanding the foregoing, the arbitrator may not award duplicative awards of attorney's fees and
expenses.
1.7 Opt-out. You may elect to opt-out (exclude yourself) from the final, binding, individual
arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in this
Agreement by sending a written letter to the Epson Address within thirty (30) days of your assent
to this Agreement (including without limitation the purchase, download, installation of the
Software or other applicable use of Epson Hardware, products and services) that specifies (i)
your name, (ii) your mailing address, and (iii) your request to be excluded from the final, binding
individual arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in
this Section 1. In the event that you opt-out consistent with the procedure set forth above, all
other terms shall continue to apply, including the requirement to provide notice prior to litigation.
427
1.8 Amendments to Section 1. Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, you
and Epson agree that if Epson makes any future amendments to the dispute resolution procedure and
class action waiver provisions (other than a change to Epson's address) in this Agreement, Epson will
obtain your affirmative assent to the applicable amendment. If you do not affirmatively assent to the
applicable amendment, you are agreeing that you will arbitrate any Dispute between the parties in
accordance with the language of this Section 1 (or resolve disputes as provided for in Section 1.7, if you
timely elected to opt-out when you first assented to this Agreement).
1.9 Severability. If any provision in this Section 1 is found to be unenforceable, that provision shall be
severed with the remainder of this Agreement remaining in full force and effect. The foregoing shall not
apply to the prohibition against class or representative actions as provided in Section 1.5. This
means that if Section 1.5 is found to be unenforceable, the entire Section 1 (but only Section 1)
shall be null and void.
Parent topic: Notices
Trademarks
EPSON
®
is a registered trademark, the EPSON logo is a registered logomark, Epson Connect
TM
and
Epson Remote Print
TM
are trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Apple, App Store, AirPrint, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X, and the AirPrint logo are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically
with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
The Mopria
TM
wordmark and the Mopria
TM
Logo are registered and/or unregistered trademarks of
Mopria Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Android, Chromebook, and Google are registered trademarks and Gmail, Google Drive, and Google
Play are trademarks of Google LLC.
Microsoft is a trademark of the Microsoft group of companies.
Wi-Fi Direct
®
is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Parent topic: Notices
428
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. The information contained herein is
designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as
applied to other products.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third
parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of:
accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this
product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and
maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any
options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson
Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from electromagnetic
interference that occurs from the use of any interface cables other than those designated as Epson
approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
This information is subject to change without notice.
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
Copyright Attribution
Parent topic: Notices
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any
Epson product. While some countries' laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in
certain circumstances, those circumstances may not be as broad as some people assume. Contact your
legal advisor for any questions regarding copyright law.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
This product will enter sleep mode after a period of nonuse. This is to ensure that the product meets
Energy Star standards of energy efficiency. More energy savings can be achieved by setting the time to
sleep to a shorter interval.
